2DJ-7059

Messrs. DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING & MARINE ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

S．No．H5361

MODEL: JLR-7800
DGPS NAVIGATOR

FINISHED DRAWING
19 February 2013

Navigation & Fishing Electronics Gro

Engineering Department
Marine Electronics Division
TEL 0422-45-9275
FAX 0422-45-9957
checked by in charge
 Contents

1. Components
2. Ship’s information
2.1 Painting Color
2.2 Power Supply

3. Specifications
4. General System Diagram of JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator
4.1 General System Diagram (1/2)
4.2 General System Diagram (2/2)

5. Interconnection Diagram of JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator

5.1 Interconnection Diagram (1/3)
5.2 Interconnection Diagram (2/3)
5.3 Interconnection Diagram (3/3)

6. Outline Drawings
6.1 NWZ-4740 Display Unit (desk top)
6.2 NWZ-4740 Display Unit (flush mount)
6.3 JLR-4341 DGPS Sensor
6.4 NQE-7700A Junction Box (for DGPS Sensor)
6.5 NQE-7700A Junction Box (for Display Unit)
6.6 NQA-4251A Output Buffer
6.7 NBD-577C Power Supply Unit
6.8 NCZ-777 Select Switch (flush mount type)
6.9 CQD-10 Junction Box
6.10 NKG-94 Printer

7. Installation
7.1 GPS Sensor Installation
7.2 Display Unit Installation
7.3 Cable Connection
7.4 Optional Peripheral Connection
7.5 LAN and Serial Connection

8. Accessories and Spare Parts

8.1 JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator
8.2 NBD-577C Power Supply Unit
8.3 NKG-94 Printer (For Spare fuse)
8.4 NKG-94 Printer (For Printer paper)

1
1. Components
Table of Components for JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator
No. Name Type Quantity Remarks
Standard Components
1 Display Unit NWZ-4740 1x3 Flush mount
2m with connector
2 DC Power Cable CFQ-7257 1x3
and fuse(2A)
3 GPS Connection Cable CFQ-9002 1x3 5m
4 Fuse MF60NR 250V 2 2x3 2A
5 Clamp Filter TFC-23-11-14 1x3 5MBAT00002
LTWBU- 12 cores/
6 Connector 1x3
12BFFA-LL7001 Serial data transmission
Copper Plate
7 MPAE30207 1x3 25Wx2000x0.3t
(Earth plate)
8 Installation Screws Kit MPTG31659 1x3 4 tapping screws/set
Flush Mounting
9 MPTG31962 1x3 4 screws/set
Screws Kit
Model Identification
10 MPNN45662 1x3
Plate
11 DGPS Sensor JLR-4341 1x3 With 15m cable
12 Screw Adapter MTV302007A 1x3 For DGPS Sensor
For DGPS Sensor,
13 Fitting Belt MPBP02520 1x3
2 belts included
14 Cable Guard Rubber MPPK31468 1x3
Options
15 Junction Box NQE-7700A 2x3
16 Pole Mounting Kit MPBP30608 1x3 For junction box
3m / 12 cores /
17 Data Cable CFQ-5374 1x2
Serial data transmission
3m / 14 cores /
18 Data Cable CFQ-5404 1x2
Dry contact signal
19 Output Buffer NQA-4251A 1 12 ports
AC100/ 220V input
20 Power Supply Unit NBD-577C 1x2
DC 24V, 1.5A
For NBD-577C,
FGB0 125V 5A 4x2 Attach to the unit
21 Spare Fuse
FGB1 250V 10A 4x2 5Ax4 and 10Ax4 per set
Refer to spare parts list
For NWZ-4740
22 Spare Parts 6ZXNA00056 1x3
listed at spare parts list
23 Select Switch NCZ-777 1 Flush mount type, N4
24 Junction Box CQD-10 3
For IEC 61162-1 or
25 Printer NKG-94 1 NMEA 0183 format
DC input: 12/ 24 V, 15W
For NKG-94, Attach to the unit
MF51NR 250V 3.15A,
26 Spare fuse 2
3.15 JRC code: 5ZFGD00201
Refer to spare parts list

2
 58mm×dia. 50mm 25m
27 Printer paper 7ZPJD0384 3
Refer to spare parts list
Flush mount panel for
28 Flush Mounting Kit MPBC43664 1x2
NWZ-4740, N4
Installation Materials
29 LAN Cable 7ZCNA0483 15mx2 Straight
30 Connector TM21P-88P(07) 2x2 For LAN Cable

3
2. Ship’s information

2.1 Painting Color

NQA-4251A: 7.5BG7/2
Munsell NCZ-777: N4
CQD-10: 7.5BG7/2
Except specified only JRC Standard

2.2 Power Supply

AC 220 V, 60 Hz, 1PH. DC 24 V

4
3. Specifications

1. GPS Receiving
Receiving frequency ：1575.42MHz±1MHz（C/A code）
Sensitivity ：-135dBm
Dynamic range ：25dB
Signal Acquisition ：Automatic by computer controlled
Maximum No. of tracked satellites ：12+SBAS1ch
Fix update rate ：every 1 second
Accuracy
GPS position fixing ：13m 2DRMS (L1, C/A code, HDOP≤ 4, without S/A）
DGPS position fixing ：5m 2DRMS (L1, C/A code, Beacon differential）
SBAS position fixing ：7m 2DRMS (L1, C/A code, SBAS differential）

2. Beacon Receiving
Receiving frequency ：283.5kHz to 325kHz
Frequency step ：500Hz
Selection of Beacon station ：Automatic or manual
Demodulation ：Minimum shift keying (MSK)
RF bit rate ：50/100/200 bps

3. General functions
Display type ：5.7″FSTNLCD,320×240 dots
Backlighting ：LED for LCD and keyboard
Dimmer ：High-Middle-Low-Off via keyboard
Waypoint memories ：10000 points, naming with 16 Characters
Waypoint entry ：Lat/Long, Bearing/Range and Event
Track memories ：2000 points maximum
Route plan ：100 routes (512 waypoints/route)
Position correction ：46 Geodetic Datum selection
Magnetic variation ：Automatic and manual
Navigation calculation ：Great circle or Rhumb line selectable
Navigation alarms ：Waypoint Arrival, Cross Track Error, Anchor Watch and
Boundary by selected distance. No Position fix,
trip, speed, water depth (*), water temperature(*)
Plot function Plot scale ：0, 2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300 NM
Plot interval ：Off and 1s ~ 60min(1sec) or 0.01 ~ 99.99(0.01NM) NM

(*) Via external temperature sensor / echo sounder

5
 Data output ：4 output ports included 1(one) RS232C type output,
NMEA0183, IEC 61162-1, and JRC format selectable
Version 1.5/2.1/2.3 of NMEA0183 selectable
Data input ：2 input ports included 1(one) RS232C type input
Relay output ：2 external Alarm outputs, Speed Log pulse outputs (200
p/NM) or ACK selectable
Dry contact (Normal open/close selectable)
Relay input ：For ACK
LAN port ：10/100Mbps,JRC Format, for ECDIS connection, etc.
Selectable Units ：NM/kn, km/km/h, mi/mi/h
Memory backup ：Internal Flush Memory
Loran C function ：Loran C TD conversion
Display language ：English
Power requirement ：12/24VDC, Less than 10W
100/220VAC with AC power supply unit

4. Environmental
Operating temperature ：DGPS Sensor -25 to 55 ºC
Display unit -15 to 55 ºC
Vibration ：IEC 60945 standard ed.4
Water proof ：DGPS Sensor IP56
Display unit IP44
EMC ：IEC60945 standard ed.4 and CE mark

6
 4. General System Diagram of JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator
4.1 General System Diagram (1/2)
(IEC 61162-1/NMEA (RS422))
No.1 DGPS No.2 DGPS *RP1S
GMDSS CONSOLE
N0510
JLR-4341 JLR-4341 *RP1S
No.1 RADAR
NQA-4251A N0512
DGPS SENSOR DGPS SENSOR *RP1S
No.2 RADAR
OUTPUT N0513
BUFFER *RP1S
SPEED LOG
Attached to JLR-4341 Attached to JLR-4341 N0515
15m (Cut for 1-15m) 15m (Cut for 1-15m) *RP1S
ECHO SOUNDER
INT. INT. N0514
*RP1S GYRO COMPASS
POLE MOUNTING KIT POLE MOUNTING KIT N0511
MPBP30608 MPBP30608 *RP1S
AUTO PILOT
N0518
NQE-7700A NQE-7700A *RP1S
VDR
N0509
JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX *RP1S
AIS
N0517
*RP1S
No.3 VHF
N0519
*RP4S *RP4S *RP1S
ODME
(Max. 50m) (Max. 50m) N0520
*RPS4 SHIP PERFORMANCE
N0501 N0502
N0524 MONITORING SYSTEM
*RP1S
NQE-7700A NQE-7700A MASTER CLOCK
N0521
*RP1S
JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX NAVTEX
N0516
*RP1S
* N0523

GPS Connection Cable GPS Connection Cable

CFQ-9002 5m CFQ-9002 5m
INT. INT. NKG-94
PRINTER
NWZ-4740 NWZ-4740 *
DISPLAY DISPLAY
UNIT UNIT *D2
LAN straight cable 15m

LAN straight cable 15m

N0524
*RP1S
INT. NCZ-777
DC Power cable

DC Power cable

SELECT
CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5374 3m

CFQ-5404 3m

CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5374 3m

CFQ-5404 3m

SWITCH
Data cable

Data cable

Data cable

Data cable

*D2
INT.
N0505

N0503
INT.

INT.

INT.

INT.

*
T.B
No.1
*RPS4 (IEC 61162-1/NMEA (RS422))
INT.
ECDIS HUB ECDIS HUB *RP2S No.1 & No.2 DGPS
CQD-10 N0504
ECDIS
*RPS4
N0506 JUNCTION *RP1S No.1 DGPS
BOX N0522
*RP1S No.2 DGPS VDR(RMS)
*RPS4 N0508

No.2

*RP4S No.1 DGPS

CQD-10 *RP4S No.2 DGPS BNWAS
No.1 JUNCTION (System fail, ACK out, ACK in)
AC 220 V *D2 BOX
1 Ø 60Hz P5704 NBD-577C
POWER
DC24V *D2 SUPPLY UNIT
N2106
*
(From GMDSS CONSOLE) *
No.2
AC 220 V *D2 NOTE
1 Ø 60Hz INT. NBD-577C
POWER 1. * DOCK SUPPLY
*D2 SUPPLY UNIT 2. JRC SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.3(T) x 25(W))
DC24V
N2105
(From GMDSS CONSOLE)
3. * DOCK SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.5(T) x 30(W)
*
or 1 x 2.5mm2)

7
4.2 General System Diagram (2/2)

No.3 DGPS

JLR-4341
DGPS SENSOR

Attached to JLR-4341
15m (Cut for 1m)

POLE MOUNTING KIT

MPBP30608

NQE-7700A
JUNCTION BOX

*250V-MPYCYS-7
(80m)

NQE-7700A
JUNCTION BOX

GPS Connection Cable

CFQ-9002 5m

NWZ-4740
DISPLAY
UNIT
DC Power cable
CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5374 3m
Data cable

No.3
CQD-10 *RPS2
No.4 VHF
JUNCTION *RPS2
IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER UNIT
BOX
*
*D2

DC24V
(BATTERY
SLD400-2)

NOTE
1. * DOCK SUPPLY
2. JRC SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.3(T) x 25(W))
3. * DOCK SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.5(T) x 30(W))

8
5. Interconnection Diagram of JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator
5.1 Interconnection Diagram (1/3)

No.1 No.2
JLR-4341 JLR-4341 NMEA (IEC 61162-1/NMEA (RS422))
DGPS SENSOR DGPS SENSOR OUTPUT TB2 A *RP1S
1A A1 GMDSS CONSOLE
1B A2 B N0510
Attached to JLR-4341 Attached to JLR-4341
15m (Cut for 1 - 15m) 15m (Cut for 1 - 15m)
NQA-4251A FG A3 A *RP1S
2A A4 No.1 RADAR
OUTPUT 2B A5 B N0512
POLE MOUNTING KIT POLE MOUNTING KIT BUFFER A *RP1S
3A A6 No.2 RADAR
MPBP30608 MPBP30608 B N0513
INT. INT. 3B A7
NQE-7700A NQE-7700A FG A8
A *RP1S
JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX 4A A9 SPEED LOG
B N0515
4B A10
*RP1S
ECHO SOUNDER
N0514

WHT
WHT

GRN
GRN

RED

BRN
RED

BRN

TB2
BLK

YEL
BLK

YEL

A *RP1S
5A B1 GYRO COMPASS
B N0511
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 5B B2
FG B3
A *RP1S
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6A B4 AUTO PILOT
6B B5 B N0518
7A B6 A *RP1S
VDR
B N0509
7B B7
*RP4S *RP4S FG B8
A *RP1S
(Max. 50m) (Max. 50m) 8A B9 AIS
B N0517
8B B10
N0501 N0502 *RP1S
NMEA VHF
NQE-7700A NQE-7700A TB1 INPUT N0519
TB1 A
JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX A A1 *RP1S
A 9A B1 ODME
B A2 B N0520
B 9B B2
A3 FG FG B3
A *RPS4 SHIP PERFORMANCE
A4 FG 10A B4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 + A5 B N0524 MONITORING SYSTEM
- A6 + DC 10B B5
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A *RP1S
- 9-40V11A B6 MASTER CLOCK
A7 11B B7 B N0521
A7
WHT

WHT
GRN
GRN

RED

BRN
RED

BRN

BLK

YEL
BLK

YEL

A8 A8 FG B8
A9 12A B9 A *RP1S NAVTEX
NC
A10 12B B10 B N0516
NC
*RP1S
* N0523
INT. GPS Connection Cable INT. GPS Connection Cable
CFQ-9002 5m CFQ-9002 5m *RP1S
GPS/DGPS GPS/DGPS INT.
NWZ-4740 NWZ-4740 CQD-10 NCZ-777
ETHERNET DISPLAY UNIT ETHERNET DISPLAY UNIT JUNCTION BOX SELECT SWITCH
LAN straight cable 15m

No.1
LAN straight cable 15m

DC DATA CONTACT DC DATA CONTACT

12/24V IN/OUT IN/OUT PRINTER 12/24V IN/OUT IN/OUT PRINTER TB01
A1 A1
1 A1 *RPS4 1 RX
B1 2 B1 INT. B1
DC Power cable

DC Power cable

2
CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5374 3m

CFQ-5404 3m

INT.

A2 3 A1 A2
CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5374 3m

CFQ-5404 3m

*D2

3 RX
B2 4 B1 B2 4
Data cable

Data cable

Data cable

Data cable

A3 5 A1 5 RX
B3 6 B1
N0505

6
N0519

GRN 7 A2
INT.

INT.

7
INT.

INT.

BLU 8 B2 8
PRP 9 A2 TD+ 9 A
GRY 10 B2 TD- 10 B
WHT 11 A1 11
BLK 12 B1 12
*RP1S
*RP1S
*RP2S
N0508
N0522
N0504

No.2 CQD-10 *
EDCIS HUB EDCIS HUB (to Interconnection *
Diagram (2/3))
*RPS4 No.1 DGPS
N0506 No.2 DGPS
ECDIS
T/B No.1 DGPS
TB01 No.2 DGPS VDR(RMS)
GRN
1 A1
BLU 2 B1
PRP 3 A2 (IEC 61162-1/NMEA (RS422))
GRY 4 B2
WHT 5 A3
No.1 BLK 6 B3
NBD-577C PRP 7 A1 *RPS4
No.2 CQD-10
POWER SUPPLY UNIT GRY 8 B1
AC 220 V *D2 (to Interconnection Diagram (2/3))
U DC24V + RED BLK 9 A2
1 Ø 60Hz P5704 BLK LBLU 10 B2
AC IN OUT -
V + LGRN 11 A3
- LBRN 12 B3
*D2 + + DC24V E
DC24V N2106 - AC100V
- IN *
(From GMDSS CONSOLE) AC220V
(Set the plug “P1” to suitable receptacle *
NKG-94 Printer
according to the AC input voltage.)
DATA DATA DC
No.2 IN OUT 12/24V
NBD-577C + - + - GND + - E
POWER SUPPLY UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AC 220 V *D2 RED
U DC24V +
+

INT.
A
B

1 Ø 60Hz
-

BLK *
AC IN OUT -
V + *D2
- N0524
*D2 + + DC24V E
DC24V AC100V
N2105 - - IN *
(From GMDSS CONSOLE) AC220V NOTE
(Set the plug “P1” to suitable receptacle 1. * DOCK SUPPLY
according to the AC input voltage.) 2. JRC SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.3(T) x 25(W))
3. * DOCK SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.5(T) x 30(W))
4. Color of cable
BLU: Blue BRN: Brown GRN: Green GRY: Gray PRP: Purple
RED: Red BLK: Black YEL: Yellow WHT: White
LBLU: Light Blue LBRN: Light Brown LGRN: Light Green

9
5.2 Interconnection Diagram (2/3)

CQD-10
JUNCTION BOX
No.2
TB01
*RPS4 A1 1 COM 1 *250V-TTYCS-4 No.1 DGPS
T.B (No.1 DGPS)
(from Interconnection B1 2 NC *250V-TTYCS-4 No.2 DGPS BNWAS
Diagram (1/3)
A2 3 COM 2
B2 4 NO (COM1, NC: SYSTEM FAIL, Dry contact, Normal Close)
A3 5 +
Data cable B3 6 - (COM2, NO: ACK OUT, Dry contact, Normal Open)
CFQ-5404 3m PRP 7 COM 1 (+, -: ACK IN+, ACK IN-)
No.2 DGPS
(from Interconnection GRY 8 NC (Contact: max. 30Vdc, 1A)
Diagram (1/3) BLK 9 COM 2
LBLU 10 NO
LGRN 11 +
LBRN 12 -

NOTE
1. * DOCK SUPPLY
2. JRC SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.3(T) x 25(W))
3. * DOCK SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.5(T) x 30(W))
4. Color of cable
BLU: Blue BRN: Brown GRN: Green GRY: Gray PRP: Purple
RED: Red BLK: Black YEL: Yellow WHT: White
LBLU: Light Blue LBRN: Light Brown LGRN: Light Green

10
5.3 Interconnection Diagram (3/3)

No.3
JLR-4341
DGPS SENSOR

Attached to JLR-4341
15m (Cut for 1m)

NQE-7700A
JUNCTION BOX POLE MOUNTING KIT
MPBP30608
WHT
GRN
RED

BRN
BLK

YEL

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5

*250V-MPYCYS-7
(80m)
NQE-7700A
JUNCTION BOX

1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
WHT
GRN
RED

BRN
BLK

YEL

GPS Connection Cable

CFQ-9002 5m
GPS/DGPS
NWZ-4740
ETHERNET
DISPLAY UNIT
DC DATA CONTACT
12/24V IN/OUT IN/OUT PRINTER
DC Power cable
CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5374 3m
Data cable

CQD-10
JUNCTION BOX
No.3
TB01
GRN 1 A *RPS2
B No.4 VHF
BLU 2
PRP 3 A *RPS2 IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER UNIT
GRY 4 B
5
6
RED 7 + *D2 RED + DC24V
BLK 8 - BLK - BATTERY
9
10 (SLD400-2)
11
12

NOTE
1. * DOCK SUPPLY
2. JRC SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.3(T) x 25(W))
3. * DOCK SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.5(T) x 30(W))
4. Color of cable
BLU: Blue BRN: Brown GRN: Green GRY: Gray PRP: Purple
RED: Red BLK: Black YEL: Yellow WHT: White
LBLU: Light Blue LBRN: Light Brown LGRN: Light Green

11
6. Outline Drawings
6.1 NWZ-4740 Display Unit (desk top)

Unit : mm
Color : Munsell N4
Mass : less than 2.3kg

12
6.2 NWZ-4740 Display Unit (flush mount)
Flush mounting kit: MPBC43664

180 or more

Unit : mm
Color : Munsell N4
Mass : less than 2.5kg

13
6.3 JLR-4341 DGPS Sensor

Color: Only JRC STANDARD

(WHITE)

Ø19
Ø6

Unit : mm
Mass : less than 1.7kg

14
 Installation of the Sensor on the Mast
Use a screw adapter (optional component or equivalent) to connect the receiver to the mast.
The diagram shows the JLR-4341, but these instructions apply equally to the JLR-4340 as well.

JLR-4341
DGPS Sensor

Fitting Belt
Screw Adapter

Clamp Band
(Dock supply)

Mast (φ26 to φ90 supported)

1. Loosen the fitting belt screw 2. Coil the fitting belt around the 3. Tighten the clamp screw with
with a screwdriver to remove mast as shown below. the screwdriver.
the clamp.

Clamp

Flathead Screwdriver

How to Install the Receiver on the Mast

15
6.4 NQE-7700A Junction Box (for DGPS Sensor)

POLE (dia 26-53)

BOLT SUS
M6x50

PLATE SUS

POLE MOUNTING KIT

(MPBP30608)

W6 SUS
SW6 SUS
N6 SUS
LN6 SUS

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSION SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
0 TO 30 +/- 1
OVER 30 TO 120 +/- 1.5
OVER 120 TO 400 +/- 2.5
OVER 400 TO 1000 +/- 4
85 OVER 1000 TO 2000 +/- 6
OVER 2000 TO 3000 +/- 8

POLE (dia 26-53)

FOR DGPS SENSOR

GLAND dia 15

COLOR: ONLY JRC STANDARD

(MUNSELL 7.5BG 7/2)
(FRP)

Unit : mm
IP Grade : IP56
Mass : 0.8kg

GLAND dia 25

ACCESSORIES OF RUBBER GASKET

250V-MPYCYS-7 RUBBER RUBBER
Q’ty
GASKET No. GASKET ID

dia 25 dia 10-20 1

(FOR NQE-7700A OF DGPS SENSOR SIDE)

16
6.5 NQE-7700A Junction Box (for Display Unit)

120

100
10

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSION SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
0 TO 30 +/- 1
78

OVER 30 TO 120 +/- 1.5

OVER 120 TO 400 +/- 2.5
OVER 400 TO 1000 +/- 4
OVER 1000 TO 2000 +/- 6
OVER 2000 TO 3000 +/- 8

85

ACCESSORIES OF RUBBER GASKET

RUBBER RUBBER
Q’ty
GASKET No. GASKET ID
250V-MPYCYS-7 dia 25 dia 10-20 1

GLAND dia 25

COLOR: ONLY JRC STANDARD

(MUNSELL 7.5BG 7/2)
(FRP)

MOUNTING HOLES (2- dia 7)

(INSTALLATION SCREW M6)
42.5
(139)

30
85

42.5

GLAND dia 15
FOR DGPS NAVIGATOR

Unit : mm
(FOR NQE-7700A OF DGPS NAVIGATOR SIDE) IP Grade : IP56
Mass : 0.6kg

17
6.6 NQA-4251A Output Buffer

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED (15) 76 (15)

DIMENSION SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
0 TO 30 +/- 1
OVER 30 TO 120 +/- 1.5
OVER 120 TO 400 +/- 2.5
OVER 400 TO 1000 +/- 4
OVER 1000 TO 2000 +/- 6
OVER 2000 TO 3000 +/- 8

MOUNTING HOLES (2- dia 7)

(INSTALLATION SCREW M6)

TB1 TB1

N.P

TB2 TB2

53
106
Note:
JUMPER OF DC INPUT VOLTAGE
DC input voltage Jumper of Terminal
TB1-IN (UPPER)
A7 JUMPER
DC 12V input A8 ON 9-16 V
Jumper cable
(Cable of 0.7 to 2.5 sqr)
(15) 76 (15)
TB1-IN (UPPER)
A7 JUMPER
DC 24V input
A8 ON 9-16 V
Not connect
Unit : mm
Mass : 0.8kg

18
6.7 NBD-577C Power Supply Unit

Specification
Input voltage:
AC 100/220V (typical), 90-132/180-264V,
50/60Hz (typical), Single phase
DC +24V (typical), 21.6-31.2V
Output voltage:
DC +24V

Caution
Before installation, do the following procedure.
1. Set the plug “P1” to suitable receptacle
according to the input voltage.
2. Stick the attached label for voltage indication on
the name plate according to the input voltage.

Unit : mm
Color : Munsell N7
Mass : 5.4kg

19
6.8 NCZ-777 Select Switch (flush mount type)

110
136
70
120

12

4- dia 7.5 or M6
T.B

64.5

160
102
N.P

(86.5)
2

(22)
CUT OUT

MOUNTING HOLES
4- dia 7.5
(34)

(16)
NCZ-777 SELECT SWITCH

CABLE INLET
102 +/- 0.5
170

118
150
(CH3)

(CH2)

(CH1)

(16)
(34)

(7) 136 +/- 0.5 (7) 8 12

150

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSION SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
0 TO 30 +/- 1
OVER 30 TO 120 +/- 1.5
OVER 120 TO 400 +/- 2.5
OVER 400 TO 1000 +/- 4
Unit : mm
OVER 1000 TO 2000 +/- 6 Mass : 1.2kg
OVER 2000 TO 3000 +/- 8

20
6.9 CQD-10 Junction Box

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSION SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
0 TO 30 +/- 1
OVER 30 TO 120 +/- 1.5
OVER 120 TO 400 +/- 2.5
OVER 400 TO 1000 +/- 4
OVER 1000 TO 2000 +/- 6
OVER 2000 TO 3000 +/- 8

33

MOUNTING HOLES (4- dia 7.5 )

(INSTALLATION SCREW M6)

N.P

110 64 (15) 80 +/- 0.5 (15)

33

Unit : mm
Mass : 1.5kg

45

21
6.10 NKG-94 Printer

Unit : mm
Color : Body N4 (JRC Standard only)
Bracket N1.5 (JRC Standard only)

22
7. Installation

Caution
Please consult with JRC or an affiliate to perform installation.
Installation by unauthorized personnel may result in malfunction.

7.1 GPS Sensor Installation

7.1.1 Selecting the Position for Installation

Caution
When connecting the cable attached to the equipment, do not bend it acutely, twist
it, or impart excessive force. Doing so sometimes causes cracks or damage to the
coating, resulting in fire or electrocution.

Do not install the sensor where there is excessive vibration.

Vibration may cause sensor failure.

Do not paint the sensor.

Doing so may result in reception problems.

The junction box rubber gaskets fit φ 10 - 20 cables.

Install the sensor where there are no obstacles, in order to ensure that GPS
signals can be directly received from satellites without interference or reflection of
signals from surrounding objects.
Whenever possible, select a place with the following characteristics.

1. An open space, which allows uniform reception of satellite signals.

2. Far away from any high power transmission antennas.
3. Outside radar beams.
4. Away from the INMARSAT antenna by at least 5 meters and outside the
INMARSAT beam.
5. Away from the antenna of a VHF transmitter and a direction finder
by at least 3 meters.
6. Away from a Magnetic Compass by at least 1 meter.
7. 3 meters or more away from amateur radio antennas.

If it is difficult to find an ideal site, select a place temporarily and install the equipment.
Conduct a test to make sure that the proper performance can be obtained and then fix the
equipment in position. If it is installed at an improper place, reception accuracy may be
impaired.

23
7.1.2 Sensor Installation Procedure
The sensor base contains 1 inch 14UNS-2B screw holes. It can be attached to poles with cut male
screws, or off-the-shelf adapters.

(1) When performing attachment, always hold and turn the sensor base. Holding and turning the
radome may result in a large amount of force applied at the junction of the base and the
radome, resulting in damage to the sensor. The diagram shows the JLR-4341, but these
instructions apply equally to the JLR-4340 as well.

Radome

Joint Off-the-shelf
Base adapter, etc

Do not apply force to the joint. Hold and turn the base.

(2) Secure the sensor cable in position with a clamp band as shown below to protect it against
damage due to vibration.

Cable

Off-the-shelf
adapter, etc
Clamp band (Dock supply)

(3) When connecting an extension cable to the DGPS sensor, always seal with self-bonding tape in
order to waterproof the connector, and wrap this section with vinyl tape to protect it.

24
7.1.3 Installation of the Sensor on the Mast
Use a screw adapter (optional component or equivalent) to connect the sensor to the mast.
The diagram shows the JLR-4341, but these instructions apply equally to the JLR-4340 as well.

JLR-4341
DGPS Sensor

Fitting Belt
MPBP02520 Screw Adapter
MTV302007A

Clamp Band (Dock supply)

Mast (φ26 to φ90 supported)

1. Loosen the fitting belt screw 2. Coil the fitting belt around the 3. Tighten the clamp screw with
with a screwdriver to remove mast as shown below. the screwdriver.
the clamp.

Clamp

Flathead Screwdriver

How to Install the Sensor on the Mast

25
7.1.4 Installation of the Sensor to pass a cable through a pole
It is possible to pass a cable through a pole, when DGPS sensor attached to poles with cut male
screws. (1inch-14 UNS-2A). In this case, Cable guard rubber (attached article) used.

(1) The cable is installed as following figure.

Do not bend the cable acutely. Doing so may result in damage to the cable.

Do not bend it acutely Cable installation figure

(2) Cable guard rubber is set in DGPS sensor.

Cable guard rubber

Push all the way in
(attached article)

26
(3) When DGPS sensor attached to poles with cut male screws, round off the corners.

round off the corners

25mm

1inch-14UNS-2A

(4) When performing attachment, always hold and turn the sensor base. Holding and turning the
radome may result in a large amount of force applied at the junction of the base and the
radome, resulting in damage to the sensor.

Radome

Joint
Base

Do not apply force to the joint. Hold and turn the base.

27
7.2 Display Unit Installation
7.2.1 Selecting the Position for Installation

Warning
Install this unit at least 1 m away from any magnetic compasses.
Installation near a magnetic compass may result in interference with the magnetic
compass, and may result in an accident.

Caution
Use the indicated screws when installing the display unit to a stable wooden
surface. Failure to do so may result in the display unit falling over, causing injury or
property damage.

The installation stand (trestle) allows this display to be set up on table-tops, walls, ceilings, etc.
Select an installation location that meets the following conditions.

7.2.2 Display Installation Procedure

Mount the unit as described below.
(1) Loosen the unit knob, and disconnect the mount from the unit.
(2) Use the included screws to secure the mount where desired.
(3) Return the unit to the mount, and tighten it with the knob.

370 or more 201 or more

190 or more

Knob Bolt Mount

(Unit: mm)

Mount (Bottom)

28
7.2.3 How to Flush Mount the Display
Flush Mount (Connection with standard included components)
Refer to the flush mount overview diagram to perform flush mount installation.
Refer to the diagrams shown below for mount hole and installation space details.

Leave space for maintenance after

installation

180 or more

(Unit: mm)

29
Flush Mount (Connection with optional component)

Leave space for maintenance after

installation

180 or more

(Unit: mm)

30
7.3 Cable Connection

Unit (Rear Connectors)

D-Sub Terminal
Used to connect to a computer (RS-232C) or printer.

CONTACT IN/OUT GPS/DGPS DATA IN/OUT ETHERNET

External Equipment Connection Terminal

(Ethernet)
Used for ECDIS connection, etc.

External Equipment Connection Terminal (Serial Transmission)

Used for radar equipment connection, etc.

Sensor Connection Terminal

GPS/DGPS sensor connection.

External Equipment Connection Terminal (Contact Signal)

Used for connection to external buzzers and optional
peripherals.

Chassis Earth Terminal

Used for connection to ship earth as needed.

Power Input Terminal

Used for power input to unit.
Always use the included power cable.

31
[Power Supply Connector]

DC12/24V

Power Cable: CFQ-7257 (Included)

① ②

Terminal
Number Name Explanation
(CFQ-7252)
1 (Black) DCIN - Connect the included power cable.
DC12/24V
2 (Red) DCIN + The voltage shall be 10.8 - 31.2 V DC.

Connection Cable Appearance

Cable Length: 2m Red

+
CFQ-7257
Black
-

Fuse Holder
(Internal 2A fuse)

Noise Filtering
Make a loop with the cable and clamp it with the included Clamp Filter as shown below.

Clamp Filter

32
[GPS/DGPS Connector]

GPS/DGPS

① ⑤
⑥
② ④
③

Terminal
Number
Name Explanation
(CFQ-9000/
CFQ-9002)
1 (Red) GPS/DGPS 13V DC Power to the sensor is supplied by the display
2 (Black) Power GND unit.
3 (White) B
RXD0 Receives data from the sensor.
4 (Green) A
5 (Yellow) TXD0 A Sends configuration data to the sensor.
6 (Brown) Unused

Cable Extension
(1) For cable lengths of less than 15 m
Use the extension cable (CFQ-9000).

Extension Cable/CFQ-9000 (Max 15 m)

(2) For cable lengths of more than 15 m

Use the junction box (NQE-7700A).

Junction Box/NQE-7700A

DGPS Cable/CFQ-9002 TTYCYS-7 for connection between junction boxes (max 50 m)

33
Coaxial Cable Kit Connection
When using a pre-existing coaxial cable, such as when switching from a JLR-6800, use a coaxial
cable kit (NQD-4414).

Coaxial Cable Kit/NQD-4414

DGPS Cable/CFQ-8919 or CFQ-9002 Existing coaxial cable

34
[Data IN/OUT Connector]

DATA IN/OUT

Data Cable: CFQ-5374 (Option)

①
⑧
② ⑨ ⑦
⑪ ⑫
③ ⑩ ⑥
④ ⑤

Terminal
Number Name Explanation
(CFQ-5374)
Receives tide, water temperature, and water depth data, as
1 (Brown) A
well as alarm ACK. (Data IN4)
RXD4
(Refer to "5.19.7.8 Setting Tidal Current Meter Input" for
2 (Red) B
details regarding tidal current display configuration)
3 (Orange) A Performs output in accordance with "Data IN/OUT1"
TXD1 configured specifications.
4 (Yellow) B (Refer to "5.19.7.1 Configuring Data IN/OUT1" for details)
5 (Green) A Performs output in accordance with "Data OUT3"
TXD3 configured specifications.
6 (Blue) B (Refer to "5.19.7.3 Setting Data OUT3" for details)
7 (Purple) A Performs output in accordance with "Data OUT2"
TXD2 configured specifications.
8 (Grey) B (Refer to "5.19.7.2 Setting Data OUT2" for details)
9 (White) A Performs output in accordance with "Data OUT4"
TXD4 configured specifications.
10 (Black) B (Refer to "5.19.7.4 Setting Data IN/OUT4" for details)
11 (Pink) GND ISO GND connection for serial transmission cable.
12 (Light Blue) GND Chassis earth

Connection Cable Appearance

CFQ-5374

3m

External Equipment

35
 Connector Assembly

(1) Prepare the cable to the following dimensions.

3mm

10mm

(2) Assemble the included components in the following order.

Sealing Nut Clamp Ring Lock Nut Housing

Seal Gasket O-Ring

Gasket installation
direction

Clamp Ring tightening torque: 1.2 - 1.5 kgf-cm

Sealing Nut tightening torque: 1.3 - 1.8 kgf-cm

36
[Contact Signal IN/OUT Connector]

CONTACT IN/OUT

Data Cable: CFQ-5404 (Option)

① ②
③ ④ ⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨
⑩ ⑪ ⑫
⑬ ⑭

Terminal
Number Name Explanation
(CFQ-5404)
1
2 Unused
3
4
5 Unused
6
7 (Purple) COM Outputs contact signal.
Contact
8 (Grey) NC (Refer to "5.19.7.5 Setting Contact Output 1"
Output 1
9 (White) NO for configuration details)
10 (Black) COM Outputs contact signal.
Contact
11 (Pink) NC (Refer to "5.19.7.6 Setting Contact Output 2"
Output 2
12 (Light Blue) NO for configuration details)
13 (Light Green) Contact ACKIN+ Inputs contact signal.
14 (Light Brown) Input ACKIN- (Performed by shorting both terminals)
NO: Normally Open NC: Normally Closed

Connection Cable Appearance

CFQ-5404

3m

Relay
External Equipment
COM
NO

NC

Contact Max DC30V/1.0A

37
[Ethernet Connector]

ETHERNET

Cable: CFQ-5473 A(Option)

CFQ-5474 A(Option)

1 Pin 8 Pin

Terminal Number
Name Explanation
(CFQ-5473)
1 (Orange/White) + Outputs data.
TX (Refer to "5.19.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" for
2 (Orange) - configuration details)
Inputs data.
3 (Green/White) RX + (Refer to "5.19.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" for
configuration details)
4 (Blue)
5 (Blue/White)
Inputs data.
6 (Green) RX - (Refer to "5.19.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" for
configuration details)
7 (Brown/White)
8 (Brown)

38
[RS232C Connector]
This port is a dedicated port for updates and printer connection.
Remove the two screws from the rear, remove the cover, and connect the cable.
Perform printer configuration via Data IN/OUT1.
Use a straight cable for updating, and a cross cable when connecting a printer.

Female (S-type)

Terminal
Name Explanation
Number
1 Unused
2 TXD Transmitted data
3 RXD Received data
4 Unused
5 GND ISO Signal ground
6 Unused
7 CTS Transmission possible
8 RTS Transmission request
9 Unused

RS232C Cable for updating

Straight Cable
① ①
② ②
Display ③ ③ PC
④ ④
⑤ ⑤
⑥ ⑥
⑦ ⑦
⑧ ⑧
⑨ ⑨
D-Sub 9 Pin D-Sub 9 Pin
Male Female
* An all-pin cable can also be used.

39
7.4 Optional Peripheral Connection
7.4.1 Sub Display Connection
Connect the sub display sensor connection terminal to the main display external equipment
connection terminal (serial).
Use a junction box (CQD-10).

Any main display external equipment connection terminal can be used. The following specifications
apply to the terminal.
Data format: IEC
Bit rate: 4800 bps
Sentence Sub Display: "On"

To display satellite information on the sub display, change the bit rate to "9600 bps", and add "GSV"
and "CD, GP, 3" to the sentence setting.

Set the display type to "Sub" to use the unit as a sub-display.

Connect to receiver connection terminal

Connect to external equipment connection terminal

Junction Box/CQD-10

Sub Display Main Display

Data Cable/CFQ-5374

DGPS Cable/CFQ-9002

Caution: carries voltage

Wrap this section with vinyl tape to protect.

①
② ○
③ ○ TXDB
④ ○ TXDA
⑤ :
⑥ ○ Main display
external equipment
connection terminal
Sub display sensor CQD-10
connection terminal terminal board

40
7.4.2 Junction Box Connection

Caution
The junction box rubber gaskets (φ25 Gland side) fit φ 10 - 20 cables.

How to Mount the Junction Box on a Flat Surface

Securely mount the junction box on a given flat surface using self-tapping screws and flat
washers as shown below.

NQE-7700A Junction Box

Tapping Screw (φ5)

Flat Washer

Memo

The self tapping screws and flat washers in the figure above are not included with
this equipment.

How to Mount the Junction Box on the Mast

Securely mount the junction box on the mast using the pole mounting kit (option: MPBP30608).

41
 Pole Mounting Kit
MPBP30608

Bracket SUS

Hex Bolt M6 X 60 SUS

Washer M6 SUS

Spring Washer M6 SUS

Nut M6 SUS

Lock Nut M6 SUS

Mast
(φ26 - φ53)
(Note) SUS: Stainless Steel

To GPS/DGPS Sensor

Gland φ15

Perform waterproofing ① or ② below for

the glands.

<Exterior>
① Waterproof with self-adhesive tape,
and cover with protective vinyl tape.

<Interior>
② Cover cable entry point gaps
completely with sealant.

Gland φ25

250V-MPYCYS-7

42
 Internal Connection
Connect the respective cables (cable from the DGPS sensor and extension cable) to the
terminals provided in the junction box as shown in the following figure.

DGPS Sensor Cable DGPS Sensor Junction Box

Line lengths: Cable Terminal
55±5 mm
Red 1
Black 2
White 3
Green 4
Yellow 5
Brown 6
Shield Line 3

JLR-4340
Junction Box
Terminal board GPS Sensor
Line lengths: Terminal
Cable
45±5 mm
Extension Cable Red 1
Black 2
White 3
Green 4
Yellow 5
Brown 6
Blue 3
Shield Line 3
Orange(not use)

7.4.3 Coaxial Cable Kit Connection

Please refer to the instructions included in the coaxial cable kit for details regarding coaxial cable kit
connection.

Coaxial Cable Kit/NQD-4414

DGPS Cable/CFQ-9002 Existing coaxial cable

43
7.4.4 Printer Connection
The RS-232C connector can be connected to the printer (DPU-414).
The RS-232C connector can be configured via Data IN/OUT1. Set the Data IN/OUT1 data format to
"Printer". The printer format data is output from RS-232C connector and also DATA IN/OUT
connector No.3,4-pin. Another equipment cannot be connected this pin.

Connect to RS-232C Connector

Printer/DPU-414

DC6.5V
Printer Cable
Power Supply 7ZCJD0254A (1.5 m) or
NBG-320 7ZCDJD0270B (9 m)

Please refer to "DPU-414 Operation Manual" and set the DIP switches on DPU-414.

DIP SW1
Switch No. Function Settings
ON/OFF
1 Input Method Serial OFF
2 Printing speed High ON
3 Auto loading ON ON
4 CR Function Carriage return OFF
5 DIP SW setting Command Enable ON
6 Print density 100% OFF
7 ON
8 ON

DIP SW2
Switch No. Function Settings
ON/OFF
1 Print mode Normal printing (40 columns) ON
2 User-defined characters buck-up ON ON
3 Character type Ordinary characters ON
4 Zero font 0 ON
5 International character set Japanese ON
6 ON
7 ON
8 ON

DIP SW3
Switch No. Function Setting
ON/OFF
1 Data bit length 8 bits ON
2 Parity permission Without ON
3 Parity condition Odd ON
4 Flow control H/W BUSY ON
5 Baud rate 4800bps ON
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF

44
7.4.5 Connecting Two Navigation Devices to a Printer
A switch (NCZ-777) is necessary when connecting 2 GPS units to printer (DPU-414).
RS-232C connectors and printer (DPU-414) can be connected.
The RS-232C connectors for both units are configured in Data IN/OUT1. The Data IN/OUT1 data
format should be set to "printer".
Use the printer connection kit (7ZXJD0076) to extend the printer power cable.

Connect to RS-232C connector

Printer/DPU-414
Switch NCZ-777

Printer cable (3 m)
7ZCNA4109

Printer connection kit

Power cable 7ZCJD0257B
and connection terminal
DPYC-1.5
MAX 8.5m Printer cable (10 m)
7ZCNA4112
DC6.5V
Power supply
NBG-320

Printer Cable (7ZCNA4109/7ZCNA4112) Pin

3 Red RXD
4 Black TXD
7 Green RTS (Not Use)
5 Blue GND

Cable Connector

Connection Example
1 Black TXD No.1 GPS 7ZCNA4112
2 Blue GND No.1 GPS 7ZCNA4112
3 Black TXD No.2 GPS 7ZCNA4112
4 Blue GND No.2 GPS 7ZCNA4112
5
6 GPS Navigator
7
8
9
7ZCNA4109 RXD Red 10
7ZCNA4109 GND Blue 11
12
Printer

NCZ-777 Terminal

45
7.4.6 Connecting 2 GPS Units to an Automatic GPS Select Switch
An automatic GPS select switch (NCZ-1537A) can be used to connect and automatically switch
between two GPS units. The No.1 GPS unit normally outputs data, but when it is not performing
positioning, the No.2 GPS unit is automatically switched over to.
To perform automatic switching, the two GPS units must be connected in a LAN, and the No.2 GPS
unit must output control signaling to the automatic GPS select switch.
Set the No.1 GPS unit LAN setting mutual monitoring to "On".
Set the No.2 GPS unit LAN setting mutual monitoring to "On", and set the control signal output port
data format to "SWITCH".
Set the Dip switch (S1) on NCZ-1537A to 1: ON and 2: ON.

No.1 GPS Unit No.1 GPS

LAN Data
GPS select
Switch
Control Signal NCZ-1537A No.1 or No.2 GPS Data

No.2 GPS
No.2 GPS Unit Data

Connection Example
The following connection conditions apply to the connection example.
・GPS Data is output from TXD3 Port (DATA OUT3) of each GPS Unit.
・Control signal is output from TXD2 Port (DATA OUT2) of No.2 GPS Unit.

Power 12/24V 24+

GND 24-
SL+
Sl-
No.2 GPS TXD2 Purple ( 7 ) DI+ Control Signal
No.2 GPS TXD2 Grey ( 8 ) DI-
No.1 GPS TXD3 Green ( 5 ) G1+ No.1 GPS Data
No.1 GPS TXD3 Blue ( 6 ) G1-
No.2 GPS TXD3 Green ( 5 ) G2+
No.2 GPS Data
No.2 GPS TXD3 Blue ( 6 ) G2-
GPS Data Output A GO+
GPS Data Output
GPS Data Output B GO-

NCZ-1537A Terminal

7.5 LAN and Serial Connection

This section contains representative examples of LAN and serial connections and settings.
Please refer to "5.19.7 Configuring Data I/O" for details regarding configuration.
The following connection conditions apply to the connection example.
・Two GPS units, 1 sub-display, and ECDIS are connected via LAN and are sharing routes
・The LAN is connected to remote maintenance
・Serial cabling is used to connect to the automatic GPS select switch and printer.
・The HUB of ECDIS is used.

46
Connection Example

ECDIS
No.1 GPS Unit No.2 GPS Unit Sub-display Remote
Maintenance

Data D-Sub LAN Data Data D-Sub LAN LAN LAN LAN
OUT3 OUT3 OUT2

LAN

Printer
DPU-414
Switch
NCZ-777

External Equipment

Switch NCZ-1537A

Setting Examples

Setting Item No.1 GPS Unit No.2 GPS Unit Sub-Display

1. Display Type Main Main Sub
2. Sensor No. 1 2 1
3. LAN
ACTIVE Route Share4 Share4 Share4
DATA Route Share Share Share
Mutual Monitoring On On On
Data OUT Connect Multicast Multicast Multicast
Format IEC IEC IEC
Sentence Sub-Display Sub-Display
ALR, ACK ALR, ACK ALR, ACK
Remote On On Off
Maintenance
4. Serial
Data IN/OUT1 Data Format Printer Printer Not yet
Bit Rate 4800 4800 determined
Data OUT2 Data Format Unused Switch
Data OUT3 Data Format IEC IEC
Bit Rate 4800 4800
Sentence User Selected User Selected
Data IN/OUT4 Unused Unused

If the "PRINTER" data format is selected, output will be in a printer-only dedicated format.
If the "SWITCH" data format is selected, automatic GPS select switch control signaling will be output.
Selecting "SUB-Display" as the sentence will allow you to select the necessary sentence for the sub-
display.

47
Setting of Display Unit

Setting Item No. 1 GPS Unit No. 2 GPS Unit No. 3 GPS Unit
1. Display Type Main Main Main
2. Sensor No. 1 2 3
3. LAN Unused
ACTIVE Route Share4 Share4
DATA Route Share Share
Mutual Off Off
Monitoring
Data OUT Connect Multicast Multicast
Format NMEA V.2.3 NMEA V.2.3
Sentence Off Off
Remote Off Off
Maintenance
4. Serial
Data IN/OUT1 Unused Unused Unused
Data OUT2 Data Format NMEA V.2.3 NMEA V.2.3 Unused
Bit Rate 4800 4800
Sentence GGA:1s,RMC:1s, GGA:1s, RMC:1s,
VTG:1s, ZDA: 1s, VTG:1s, ZDA: 1s,
DTM:1s, RMB:1s, DTM:1s, RMB:1s,
APB:1s APB:1s
Data OUT3 Data Format NMEA V.2.3 NMEA V.2.3 Unused
Bit Rate 4800 4800
Sentence GGA:1s,RMC:1s, GGA:1s, RMC:1s,
VTG:1s, ZDA: 1s, VTG:1s, ZDA: 1s,
DTM:1s, RMB:1s, DTM:1s, RMB:1s,
APB:1s APB:1s
Data IN/OUT4 Data Format NMEA V.2.3 NMEA V.2.3 Unused
Bit Rate 4800 4800
Sentence REMOTE:4s REMOTE:4s
5.Contact Unused
Contact OUT1 SYSTEM SYSTEM
Contact OUT2 ALARM ACK ALARM ACK

48
8. Accessories and Spare Parts
8.1 JLR-7800 DGPS Navigator
BOX No. P.

SHIP SETS PER

SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
NO. VESSEL

NWZ-4740 JLR-7800
Display Unit DGPS Navigator 3
表示器 DGPS航法装置

QUANTITY REMARKS

ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB

NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO.
SET VESS BOX NO.

Fuse MF60NR 250V 2

1 2 3
ヒューズ 5ZFGD00010

10

NFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO.,LTD.. DWG.NO 6ZXNA00056

Note: Spare Part (Description or JRC code number) may be replaced with compatible part.
予備品（型名・コード）は、予告無く互換品に変更することがございます。
Inquiry regarding the order of apart : Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail : [email protected]

49
8.2 NBD-577C Power Supply Unit
(Attach to the unit)
BOX No. P.

SHIP SETS PER

SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
NO. VESSEL

NBD-577C JLR-7800
Power Supply Unit DGPS Navigator 2
電源装置 DGPS航法装置

QUANTITY REMARKS

ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB

NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO.
SET VESS BOX NO.

Fuse Φ6.4 FGB0 125V 5A

1 2 4
ヒューズ 30

Fuse Φ6.4 FGB1 250V 10A

2 2 4
ヒューズ 31.8

10

NFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO.,LTD.. DWG.NO

Note: Spare Part (Description or JRC code number) may be replaced with compatible part.
予備品（型名・コード）は、予告無く互換品に変更することがございます。
Inquiry regarding the order of apart : Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail : [email protected]

50
8.3 NKG-94 Printer (For Spare fuse)
(Attach to the unit)
BOX No. P.

SHIP SETS PER

SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
NO. VESSEL

NKG-94 JLR-7800
Printer DGPS Navigator 1
プリンタ DGPS航法装置

QUANTITY REMARKS

ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB

NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO.
SET VESS BOX NO.

Fuse MF51NR 250V 3.15

1 2 2
ヒューズ 5ZFGD00201

10

NFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO.,LTD.. DWG.NO

Note: Spare Part (Description or JRC code number) may be replaced with compatible part.
予備品（型名・コード）は、予告無く互換品に変更することがございます。
Inquiry regarding the order of apart : Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail : [email protected]

51
8.4 NKG-94 Printer (For Printer paper)
BOX No. P.

SHIP SETS PER

SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
NO. VESSEL

NKG-94 JLR-7800
Printer DGPS Navigator 1
プリンタ DGPS航法装置

QUANTITY REMARKS

ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB

NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO.
SET VESS BOX NO.

Printer
Ø50
1 Paper 1 3
58 7ZPJD0384
記録紙

10

NFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO.,LTD.. DWG.NO

Note: Spare Part (Description or JRC code number) may be replaced with compatible part.
予備品（型名・コード）は、予告無く互換品に変更することがございます。
Inquiry regarding the order of apart : Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail : [email protected]

52
 JLR-7500/7800
JLR-7500/7 800
NWZ-4
NWZ -4740
740
GPS NAVIGATOR

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPNA4137 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JUL. 2012 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan
 Foreword

Thank you for purchasing the JRC GPS Navigator JLR-7500/7800.

This equipment is a high-performance navigation equipment consisting of a DGPS/GPS
sensor and navigator, can retrieve the position data using the DGPS/GPS sensor to display
various navigation information on the display.

● Thoroughly read this instruction manual before operating the equipment.

● Keep this manual nearby the equipment to allow ready access to it if necessary. It may
provide valuable information on how to deal with a given situation that may arise during the
operation.

i
 Before Commencing the Operation

Symbols
Several symbols are used in this manual to ensure safety and proper operation of the
equipment and to avoid possible human injury or property damage. These symbols and
their meanings are shown below. Please read and understand these symbols before
proceeding to read this manual.

Instructions shown with this symbol represent what can

WARNING cause death or serious injury if not observed.

Instructions shown with this symbol represent what may

CAUTION cause injury or property damage if not observed.

Examples of the Symbols

The symbols shown in the ∆ mark represent those that require attention
(including potential dangers and warnings).
A depiction of the type of caution is shown inside the symbol (the left
symbol indicates a general caution).

The symbols shown in the [ mark represent actions which are

prohibited. A depiction of the type of prohibited action is shown inside
the symbol (the left symbol indicates that disassembly is prohibited).

The Q symbol indicates required actions. A depiction of the type of

required action is shown inside the symbol (the left symbol indicates that
the power plug must be disconnected from the outlet).

ii
 Precautions Upon the Operation

WARNING
Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. Doing so may result in fire,
electric shock, or equipment failure.

Do not allow the display to become wet. Doing so may result in fire, electric
shock, or equipment failure.

Operate the equipment only at the indicated voltage. Failure to do so may

result in fire, electric shock, or equipment failure.

Install this unit at least 1 m away from any magnetic compasses. Installation
near a magnetic compass may result in interference with the magnetic
compass, and may result in an accident.

Do not perform internal inspections or modifications of the equipment.

Inspection or modification by unauthorized personnel may result in fire, electric
shock, or equipment failure. Please consult with JRC or an affiliate to perform
internal inspections or repair.

When disposing of the used lithium battery, place insulating tape over the
battery terminals, or otherwise insulate the battery. Failure to do so may result
in heating, explosion, or fire due to a shorted battery.

iii
 Precautions Upon the Operation

CAUTION
This equipment is not designed to automatically make judgments on the
position data. The navigation information including the position data needs to
be judged by the user himself.

Do not use the equipment in the environment other than those provided in the
specification. Doing so may result in equipment failure, malfunction, or injury.

Do not install the display unit in the location where it may come in contact with
water, oil, or chemicals. Doing so may result in equipment failure,
malfunction, or injury.

Do not install the equipment in the place subject to vibration or shock.

Doing so may result in the equipment falling or collapsing, resulting in
equipment failure or injury.

Do not place any item on the top of the equipment.

Doing so may result in equipment failure, malfunction, or injury.

Please consult with JRC or an affiliate to perform installation. Installation by

unauthorized personnel may result in malfunction.

Use only the specified battery. Failure to do so may result in battery leakage
or rupture, resulting in fire, injury, or equipment failure.

Do not use benzine, alcohol or thinner when caring this equipment.

Doing so may result in removing the paint or changing of properties.
Wipe off the grime lightly with a dry soft cloth.

Use the indicated screws when installing the display unit to a stable wooden
surface. Failure to do so may result in the display unit falling over, causing
injury or property damage.

Use only the specified fuse.

Failure to do so may result in fire or equipment failure.

Use only the specified battery.

Failure to do so may result in equipment failure or malfunction.

iv
 CAUTION
When connecting the cable attached to the equipment, do not bend it acutely, twist
it, or impart excessive force. Doing so sometimes causes cracks or damage to the
coating, resulting in fire or electrocution.

Do not install the sensor where there is excessive vibration.

Vibration may cause sensor failure.

Do not paint the sensor.

Doing so may result in reception problems.

Do not install the sensor where temperature exceeds 55 degrees Celsius and
there is covered with exhaust gas from funnel . Doing so may result in flood and
cause sensor failure.

The junction box rubber gaskets (25 f Gland side) fit φ 10mm – 20mm cables.

Install the sensor where there are no obstacles, in order to ensure that GPS signals
can be directly received from satellites without interference or reflection of signals
from surrounding objects.
Whenever possible, select a place with the following characteristics.

1. An open space, which allows uniform reception of satellite signals.

2. Far away from any high power transmission antennas.
3. Outside radar beams.
4. Away from the INMARSAT antenna by at least 5 meters and outside
the INMARSAT beam.
5. Away from the antenna of a VHF transmitter and a direction finder
by at least 3 meters.
6. Away from a Magnetic Compass by at least 1 meter.
7. 3 meters or more away from amateur radio antennas.

If it is difficult to find an ideal site, select a place temporarily and install the equipment. Conduct a
test to make sure that the proper performance can be obtained and then fix the equipment in
position. If it is installed at an improper place, reception accuracy may be impaired.

v
 Appearance of the Equipment
●NWZ-4740 Display Unit

●JLR-4341 DGPS Sensor Unit

●JLR-4340 GPS Sensor Unit

vi
 Terminology
Term Meaning (Descriptions)
2D (2 dimension) Positioning with antenna elevation height in addition to satellite
data.
3D (3 dimension) The three dimensional position fix, 4 or more satellites required.
Active route Route that is currently used by a ship
Anchor alarm This alarm monitors that the own ship is the preset distance or
more away from the waypoint.
Arrival alarm This alarm informs that the own ship has traveled the preset
distance, approaching the waypoint.
Beacon information Beacon data which is broadcast by message type 16.
Boundary alarm This alarm informs that the own ship has got into the preset route.
CCRP Abbreviation of Consistent Common Reference Point. Reference
position of the own ship.
CDI Abbreviation of Course Deviation Indicator. This indicator shows
information on the deviation from the scheduled route and on the
direction into which the ship should be steered.
Checksum An error detection method to check that the data has been correctly
transmitted.
COG Course Over Ground.
Course Direction in which the ship is traveling, which is the bearing mainly
displayed by the GPS.
CURRENT Sea and ocean currents, expressed in speed and direction.
Data route Ship route data that is stored in the memory of the equipment
Default gateway Equipment connected externally from a constructed network.
DISP-DPU The main circuitry of display unit.
DGPS Abbreviation of Differential Global Positioning System. GPS
satellite error data sent from a reference station whose position is
accurately known is received via beacon from a beacon station,
improving positioning accuracy.
FRAM Nonvolatile memory using a ferroelectric substance.
Geodetic Conditions for expressing position via latitude and longitude.
GPS Satellite (GPS) Abbreviation of Global Positioning System. Refers to satellites
launched for navigational support of military vessels managed by
the United States Department of Defense.
HDOP Abbreviation of Horizontal Dilution of Precision. Indicates accuracy
of positioning. The smaller the number, the higher the accuracy. If
GPS satellites are unevenly distributed, this number will grow. If
GPS satellites are evenly distributed, this number will be smaller.
IEC IEC is the abbreviation of International Electrotechnical
Commission. It is an international standard governing electrical
and electronic technologies.
IP address ID number assigned to equipment on a constructed network.

vii
IPXX IPXX is Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
1st numeral: Against ingress of solid foreign objects (0 – 6)
2nd numeral: Against ingress of water with harmful effects (0 - 8).
(IPX4: splash-proof, IPX6: waterproof)
LAN Abbreviation of Local Area Network. A network is constructed for
transmitting and receiving data.
LCD Unit (LCD) Liquid Crystal Display Unit.
Log Pulse Contact output signal, output in 1 pulse per nm.
Expressed in units of "p/nm". mi/h Unit of ship speed.
Loran time difference
display Method for expressing the present position with loran system time
difference. (The method is for operators who have a background in
loran navigation.)
MAC address ID number assigned to LAN IC
Master reset This function changes the settings of the display unit and GPS
sensor back to the factory settings. The function clears all the
data.
Multipath Wave Waves received from multiple directions due to reflection or
refraction of an initial wave by obstacles.
Mutual monitoring mode When two navigators are installed, they monitor their position fixing
status each other by using this function.
NMEA0183 (NMEA) Abbreviation of National Marine Electrical Association 0183.
International standard for naval equipment transmission
established by the National Marine Electrical Association.
Positioning Use of GPS or DGPS receiving functions to determine the current
position of a ship.
RAIM Accuracy Standard
(RAIM) Abbreviation of Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. This
system automatically detects failed satellites and deselects their
positioning data from calculations. Including data from failed
satellites will result in a decrease in positioning accuracy; the RAIM
accuracy standard indicates the accuracy degradation base for
removal of failed satellites from positioning calculations.
Ranging Positioning with the use of SBAS satellite in addition to GPS
satellite.
Reception Level GPS signal reception level.
Route plan Plan registered with multiple waypoints in the navigation order
RS-232C Serial data transmission standard. It is unbalanced, and hence can
only be used for short distance transmission.
RS-422 Balanced serial transmission standard.
SBAS Abbreviation of Satellite Based Augmentation System. It is a
blanket term for wide scale GPS support systems using fixed
position satellites which send GPS error correction data over a wide
range.
SBAS Search SBAS reception mode (manual / automatic).
Shared route Function that uses the same route as other functions such as
ECDIS do. The route can be updated automatically by sharing the
active route.
Smoothing Function for averaging over a specified number of seconds.
viii
SOG Speed Over Ground, This is the ship’s relative speed to the ground.
SPEED The speed mainly measured by the GPS.
STW Speed Through Water.
Subnet mask Value for identifying the network address
Symbol information Information of symbols displayed on the plotting screen. The
information includes symbol positions, comments, etc.
TD Abbreviation of Time Difference. Time difference from the
master-station signal of the loran system to the slave-station signal.
Message Type 0 SBAS satellite test broadcasting.
UTC Abbreviation of Coordinated Universal Time.

XTD alarm This alarm informs that the own ship has got out of the scheduled
route by the preset distance or more.

ix
 Contents

FOREWORD ...........................................................................................................................I

BEFORE COMMENCING THE OPERATION ..........................................................................II

PRECAUTIONS UPON THE OPERATION .............................................................................III

PRECAUTIONS UPON THE OPERATION ............................................................................ IV

APPEARANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. VI

TERMINOLOGY.................................................................................................................... VII

SECTION1 EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW..............................................................................1-1

1.1 FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 FEATURES ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................ 1-2
Standard Configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-2
Option 3
1.4 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.5 SYSTEM DIAGRAM............................................................................................................ 1-13

SECTION 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF EACH UNIT..................................................2-1

2.1 NWZ-4740 DISPLAY UNIT ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 JLR-4341 DGPS SENSOR ................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 JLR-4340 GPS SENSOR...................................................................................................... 2-3

SECTION 3 DISPLAY SCREEN ........................................................................................3-1

3.1 DISPLAY SCREEN ............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Navigation Information Screen......................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.2 Plotting Screen 1.............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.3 Plotting Screen 2.............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.4 Plotting Screen 3.............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.5 CDI Screen....................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.6 GPS Information Screen .................................................................................................. 3-9
3.1.7 Waypoint Information Screen........................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.8 Beacon Information Screen ............................................................................................. 3-9
3.1.9 Navigation Assistance Screen ....................................................................................... 3-10

SECTION 4 OPERATION ..................................................................................................4-1

4.1 MENU LIST ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 BASIC OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.1 Turning the Unit On.......................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1.1 Startup (Standard) .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1.2 Startup (Error-1) ....................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.3 Startup (Error-2) ....................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.4 Startup (Error-3) ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.2 Turning the Unit Off.......................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.3 Adjusting the Backlight..................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.4 Adjusting the Contrast...................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.5 Stopping the Alarm Buzzer............................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.6 Changing the Display....................................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.7 Displaying Alarm Information ........................................................................................... 4-9
4.3 PLOT SCREEN OPERATION............................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.1 Cursor Operation ........................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1.1 Displaying the Cursor ............................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.1.2 Moving the Cursor .................................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.1.3 Centering the Cursor Position ................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.1.4 Changing Cursor Size ............................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.2 Moving the Screen ......................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 Zooming the Screen In and Out..................................................................................... 4-12
 4.3.4 Selecting North Up, Course Up, Relative North Up ....................................................... 4-12
4.3.5 Centering the Screen on the Ship.................................................................................. 4-12
4.3.6 Waypoint Symbol Display .............................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.6.1 Displaying Waypoint Information............................................................................ 4-13
4.3.6.2 Editing Waypoint Symbols...................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.6.3 Deleting Waypoint Symbols ................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.7 Route Display................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.7.1 Displaying Route Information ................................................................................. 4-16
4.3.7.2 Editing Route Information....................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.7.3 Skipping Route Waypoints ..................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.8 Track Display ................................................................................................................. 4-18
4.3.8.1 Setting the Track Period ......................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.8.2 Changing Track Line Type...................................................................................... 4-19
4.3.8.3 Deleting Tracks....................................................................................................... 4-19
4.3.9 Event and Mark Symbol Display .................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.9.1 Entering Events ................................................................................................. 4-20
4.3.9.2 Entering Marks ....................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.9.3 Changing Event/Mark Shapes ............................................................................... 4-21
4.3.9.4 Displaying Event/Mark Information ........................................................................ 4-21
4.3.9.5 Editing Event/Mark Information .............................................................................. 4-23
4.3.9.6 Registering Event/Mark Positions to the Waypoint List.......................................... 4-24
4.3.9.7 Deleting Event/Mark Symbols ................................................................................ 4-24
4.3.10 Line Display.................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.10.1 Drawing Lines......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.10.2 Deleting Lines......................................................................................................... 4-26
4.3.10.3 Changing Line Types.............................................................................................. 4-27
4.3.11 Own Ship Display........................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.11.1 Displaying the Distance Circle ............................................................................... 4-27
4.3.11.2 Displaying the Own Ship Vector............................................................................. 4-27
4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen Symbols .......................................................................................... 4-28
4.4 REGISTERING WAYPOINTS ............................................................................................. 4-29
4.4.1 Displaying the Waypoint List.......................................................................................... 4-29
4.4.2 Registering Waypoints ................................................................................................... 4-30
4.4.2.1 Registering the Own Ship Position......................................................................... 4-31
4.4.2.2 Registering Latitude and Longitude ....................................................................... 4-31
4.4.2.3 Registering the Cursor Position ............................................................................. 4-32
4.4.2.4 Registering a Bearing and Distance from a Specified Position.............................. 4-32
4.4.2.5 Registering from the Event/Mark List ..................................................................... 4-34
4.4.3 Changing the Waypoint Symbol Shape ......................................................................... 4-34
4.4.4 Editing Waypoint Information ......................................................................................... 4-35
4.4.5 Copying Waypoint Information....................................................................................... 4-36
4.4.6 Deleting Waypoints ........................................................................................................ 4-39
4.5 ROUTE PLANNING ............................................................................................................ 4-40
4.5.1 Displaying the Route List ............................................................................................... 4-40
4.5.2 Creating Routes ............................................................................................................. 4-42
4.5.3 Editing Routes................................................................................................................ 4-43
4.5.3.1 Changing Waypoint Information ............................................................................. 4-43
4.5.3.2 Adding Route Waypoints........................................................................................ 4-44
4.5.4 Copying Routes ............................................................................................................. 4-46
4.5.5 Deleting Routes ............................................................................................................. 4-48
4.5.6 Sharing Routes with ECDIS........................................................................................... 4-49
4.5.6.1 Sharing Data Routes .............................................................................................. 4-49
4.5.6.2 Sharing Active Routes ............................................................................................ 4-51
4.5.7 Setting Route Default Settings....................................................................................... 4-53
4.6 PERFORMING NAVIGATION ............................................................................................. 4-54
4.6.1 Selecting a Route from the Route List ........................................................................... 4-54
4.6.2 Starting Navigation with the GOTO Key......................................................................... 4-56
4.6.3 Stopping Navigation ....................................................................................................... 4-60
4.6.3.1 Ending Navigation with GOTO key ........................................................................ 4-60
4.6.3.2 Ending Navigation in Menu .................................................................................... 4-60
4.7 EVENTS/MARKS ................................................................................................................ 4-61
4.7.1 Displaying Events/Marks................................................................................................ 4-61
4.7.2 Event and Mark Information Display.............................................................................. 4-61
4.7.3 Editing Event and Mark Information............................................................................... 4-62
 4.7.4 Deleting Event/Mark Information.................................................................................... 4-62
4.8 LIST SCREEN OPERATION............................................................................................... 4-63
4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List...................................................................................... 4-63
4.8.1.1 Moving the Cursor with the Directional Keys ......................................................... 4-63
4.8.1.2 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter a Number and Move the Cursor ................... 4-64
4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number ............................................................. 4-64
4.8.2.1 Moving the Cursor with the Directional Keys ......................................................... 4-64
4.8.2.2 Jumping to an Unused Number ............................................................................. 4-65
4.8.2.3 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter a Number and Move the Cursor ................... 4-66
4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List...................................................................................... 4-67
4.8.3.1 Moving the Cursor with the Directional Keys and Selecting a Range.................... 4-67
4.8.3.2 Moving the Cursor with the Numeric Keypad and Selecting a Range ................... 4-68
4.9 ENTERING COMMENTS.................................................................................................... 4-69
4.9.1 Text Entry ....................................................................................................................... 4-69
4.9.2 Deleting Text .................................................................................................................. 4-71
4.9.3 Adding Text .................................................................................................................... 4-71
4.9.4 Displaying Characters Assigned to the Numeric Keypad .............................................. 4-72
4.10 MOB .................................................................................................................................... 4-73
4.11 ALARM SETTINGS............................................................................................................. 4-74
4.11.1 Setting Alarms ................................................................................................................ 4-74
4.11.2 Setting Alarm Sounds .................................................................................................... 4-77
4.12 NAVIGATION ASSISTANCE ............................................................................................... 4-78
4.12.1 Measuring the Trip Distance and Time During Navigation (Navigation Assistance 1)... 4-78
4.12.2 Measuring the Trip Distance and Time (Navigation Assistance 2) ................................ 4-79
4.12.3 Measuring the Distance and Bearing Between 2 Points (Navigation Assistance 4)...... 4-80
4.13 BEACON INFORMATION ................................................................................................... 4-81
4.14 DISPLAY SETTINGS .......................................................................................................... 4-82
4.14.1 Adjusting Contrast.......................................................................................................... 4-82
4.14.2 Adjusting Brightness ...................................................................................................... 4-82
4.14.3 Setting the Click Sound.................................................................................................. 4-83
4.14.4 Setting Reversed Display............................................................................................... 4-83
4.14.5 Input Assistance Settings............................................................................................... 4-84
4.14.6 Selecting the Display Screen ......................................................................................... 4-84
4.15 SYSTEM SETTINGS .......................................................................................................... 4-85
4.15.1 Setting the Time Difference............................................................................................ 4-85
4.15.2 Setting the Date Display ................................................................................................ 4-85
4.15.3 Setting the Time Display ................................................................................................ 4-86
4.15.4 Setting the Geodetic System ......................................................................................... 4-86
4.15.5 Setting Distance and Speed Units ................................................................................. 4-86
4.15.6 Setting Height and Depth Units...................................................................................... 4-86
4.15.7 Setting Temperature Units ............................................................................................. 4-87
4.15.8 Setting Magnetic Correction........................................................................................... 4-87
4.15.9 Setting the Maximum Analogue Speed Meter Value...................................................... 4-88
4.16 GPS/BEACON/SBAS SETTINGS....................................................................................... 4-89
4.16.1 Setting the GPS Mode ................................................................................................... 4-89
4.16.2 Setting the Fixing Mode ................................................................................................. 4-90
4.16.3 Setting the Elevation Mask ............................................................................................ 4-90
4.16.4 Setting HDOP................................................................................................................. 4-90
4.16.5 Setting Position, Speed, and Course Smoothing........................................................... 4-91
4.16.6 Setting RAIM .................................................................................................................. 4-91
4.16.7 Initializing the GPS......................................................................................................... 4-92
4.16.8 Setting Beacon/SBAS .................................................................................................... 4-93
4.16.9 Setting LORAN A/C........................................................................................................ 4-95
4.17 VERSION DISPLAY ............................................................................................................ 4-96
4.18 LANGUAGE SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 4-97
4.19 PRINT………………………………………………………………………………………………4-98
4.19.1 Ship information is printed when it is necessary…………………………………………..4-98
4.19.2 Setting the output interval……………………………………………………………………4-98
4.20 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION........................................................................................ 4-99
4.20.1 Setting the Display Type .............................................................................................. 4-100
4.20.2 Setting the GPS Sensor Number ................................................................................. 4-100
4.20.3 Setting Sensor Position / CCRP .................................................................................. 4-101
4.20.4 Equipment Check......................................................................................................... 4-102
4.20.4.1 Input Port Check................................................................................................... 4-102
 4.20.4.2 Performing Self-diagnosis .................................................................................... 4-102
4.20.4.3 Displaying and Outputting Error Logs .................................................................. 4-103
4.20.4.4 Outputting Settings............................................................................................... 4-103
4.20.5 Performing a Master Reset (Reset) ............................................................................. 4-104
4.20.6 Performing a Demo...................................................................................................... 4-104
4.20.7 Data I/O Settings.......................................................................................................... 4-105
4.20.7.1 Configuring Data IN/OUT1 ................................................................................... 4-106
4.20.7.2 Setting Data OUT2 ................................................................................................4-111
4.20.7.3 Setting Data OUT3 ................................................................................................4-111
4.20.7.4 Setting Data IN/OUT4 ...........................................................................................4-111
4.20.7.5 Setting Contact Output 1 ...................................................................................... 4-112
4.20.7.6 Setting Contact Output 2 ...................................................................................... 4-112
4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings ............................................................................................ 4-113
4.20.7.8 Setting Tidal Current Meter Input ......................................................................... 4-116
4.20.8 Setting the IP Address ................................................................................................. 4-117

SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..............................................................5-1

5.1 GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION .................................................................. 5-1
5.2 ALARMS................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 Repair Unit ....................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.3 Regular Replacement Parts............................................................................................. 5-4

SECTION 6 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................6-1

6.1 GPS SENSOR INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Selecting the Position for Installation ............................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Sensor Installation Procedure.......................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Installation of the Sensor on the Mast.............................................................................. 6-3
6.1.4 Installation of the Sensor to pass a cable through a pole…………………………………..6-4
6.2 DISPLAY UNIT INSTALLATION............................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.1 Selecting the Position for Installation ............................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2 Display Installation Procedure ......................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.3 How to Flush Mount the Display ...................................................................................... 6-7
6.3 CABLE CONNECTION ......................................................................................................... 6-9
6.4 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL CONNECTION ......................................................................... 6-18
6.4.1 Sub Display Connection................................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.2 Junction Box Connection ............................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.3 Coaxial Cable Kit Connection ........................................................................................ 6-21
6.4.4 Printer Connection ......................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.5 Connecting Two Navigation Devices to a Printer........................................................... 6-23
6.4.6 Connecting 2 GPS Units to an Automatic GPS Select Switch....................................... 6-24
6.5 LAN and Serial Connection………………………………………………………………………6-25
6.6 CONNECTION DIAGRAM……………………………………………………………………….6-26

SECTION 7 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ..............................................................................7-1

7.1 WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 REPAIR PARTS STOCKING PERIOD.................................................................................. 7-1
7.3 WHEN REQUESTING SERVICE.......................................................................................... 7-1
7.4 RECOMMENDED CHECKS AND INSPECTION ................................................................. 7-1

SECTION８ DISPOSAL .....................................................................................................8-1

8.1 DISPOSAL OF THE EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES ...................................................................................... 8-1

SECTION 9 SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................9-1

9.1 NWZ-4740 DISPLAY UNIT ................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Basic ................................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2 Environment ..................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.3 External Interface............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2 JLR-4341 DGPS SENSOR ................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 Basic ................................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Environment ..................................................................................................................... 9-3
 9.3 JLR-4340 GPS SENSOR...................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3.1 Basic ................................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3.2 Environment ..................................................................................................................... 9-4

APPENDIX ........................................................................................................... APPENDIX-1

APPENDIX1 LIST OF GEODETIC SYSTEM...................................................................... Appendix-1
APPENDIX2 LIST OF STANDARD TERMS, UNITS AND ABBREVIATIONS .................... Appendix-2
APPENDIX3 DEFAULT SETTINGS .................................................................................. Appendix-7
 Section1 Equipment Overview
1.1 Functions

This equipment (JLR-7800/JLR-7500) is a GPS navigator with a JLR-4341 DGPS or JLR-4340

GPS sensor being connected to the NWZ-4740 display unit.
The GPS navigator operates around-the-clock to measure the position with high accuracy
anywhere in the world and in all weather conditions. In addition, the GPS navigator can increase
the accuracy of position fixing by receiving correction data from the DGPS beacon station and
SBAS satellites.

1.2 Features
 Registration of up to 100 routes and 10000 waypoints

 Availability of four output ports

 Sharing of a route with the ECDIS by installing a LAN

 High visibility 5.7-inch FSTN LCD

 Installation of multiple graphic display modes

 Mutual acknowledgment through the contact or ALR

 Improvement of operability by using various menus

 Built-in SBAS function

 Built-in RAIM function

1-1
1.3 Configuration
Standard Configuration

JLR-7800
No Name Model Code Q'ty Notes
1 Display Unit NWZ-4740 NWZ-4740 1
1-1 Power Cable CFQ-7257 CFQ-7257 1 2m/with Fuse holder
GPS Connection
1-2 CFQ-9002 CFQ-9002 1 5m
Cable
1-3 Fuse MF60NR 250V 2 5ZFGD00010 2 2A Fuse
1-4 Clamp Filter TFC-23-11-14 5MBAT00002 1 5MBAT00002
LTWBU-12BFFA- 12 cores/Serial data
1-5 Connector 5JCDX00049 1
LL7001 transmission
1-6 Copper Plate MPAE30207 MPAE30207 1 25W x 2000 x 0.3t
Model
1-7 Identification MPNN45662 MPNN45662 1
Plate
Installation
1-8 MPTG31659 MPTG31659 1 4 tapping screws
Screw
Flush Mounting
1-9 MPTG31962 MPTG31962 1 4 screws
Screws Kit
SHIP
1-10 REGISTRATION 7ZPJD0065 7ZPJD0065 1
FORM
2 DGPS Sensor JLR-4341 JLR-4341 1
2-1 Screw Adapter MTV302007A MTV302007A 1
2-2 Mounting Band MPBP02520 MPBP02520 1 include 2 bands
Cable guard
2-3 MPPK31468 MPPK31468 1
rubber
Instruction
2-4 7ZPNA4162 7ZPNA4162 1
Manual
Warranty Card
Europe 7ZPBS2901C 7ZPBS2901C 1
2-5
North America 7ZPBS2902D 7ZPBS2902D 1
Asia/Oceania 7ZPBS2903C 7ZPBS2903C 1
Instruction
3 7ZPNA4137 7ZPNA4137 1
Manual

JLR-7500
No Name Model Code Q'ty Notes
1 Display Unit NWZ-4740 NWZ-4740 1
1-1 Power Cable CFQ-7257 CFQ-7257 1 2m/with Fuse holder
GPS Connection
1-2 CFQ-9002 CFQ-9002 1 5m
Cable
1-3 Fuse MF60NR 250V 2 5ZFGD00010 2 2A Fuse
1-4 Clamp Filter TFC-23-11-14 5MBAT00002 1 5MBAT00002
LTWBU-12BFFA- 12 cores/Serial data
1-5 Connector 5JCDX00049 1
LL7001 transmission
1-6 Copper Plate MPAE30207 MPAE30207 1 25W x 2000 x 0.3t
Model
1-7 Identification MPNN45662 MPNN45662 1
Plate
Installation
1-8 MPTG31659 MPTG31659 1 4 tapping screws
Screw
1-2
 SHIP
1-10 REGISTRATION 7ZPJD0065 7ZPJD0065 1
FORM
Flush Mounting
1-9 MPTG31962 MPTG31962 1 4 screws
Screws Kit
2 GPS Sensor JLR-4340 JLR-4340 1
2-1 Screw Adapter MTV302007A MTV302007A 1
2-2 Mounting Band MPBP02520 MPBP02520 1 include 2 bands
Instruction
2-3 7ZPNA4008 7ZPNA4008 1
Manual
Warranty Card
Europe 7ZPBS2901C 7ZPBS2901C 1
2-4
North America 7ZPBS2902D 7ZPBS2902D 1
Asia/Oceania 7ZPBS2903C 7ZPBS2903C 1
Instruction
3 7ZPNA4137 7ZPNA4137 1
Manual

NWZ-4740
No Name Model Code Q'ty Notes
1 Display Unit NWZ-4740 NWZ-4740 1
1-1 Power Cable CFQ-7257 CFQ-7252 1 2m/with Fuse holder
GPS Connection
1-2 CFQ-9002 CFQ-9002 1 5m
Cable
1-3 Fuse MF60NR 250V 2 5ZFGD00010 2 2A Fuse
1-4 Clamp Filter TFC-23-11-14 5JCDX00049 1 5MBAT00002
LTWBU-12BFFA- 12 cores/Serial data
1-5 Connector 5MBAT00002 1
LL7001 transmission
1-6 Copper Plate MPAE30207 MPAE30207 1 25W x 2000 x 0.3t
Model
1-7 Identification MPNN45662 MPNN45662 1
Plate
Installation
1-8 MPTG31659 MPTG31659 1 4 tapping screws
Screw
Flush Mounting
1-9 MPTG31962 MPTG31962 1 4 screws
Screws Kit
SHIP
1-10 REGISTRATION 7ZPJD0065 7ZPJD0065 1
FORM
Instruction
2 7ZPNA4137 7ZPNA4137 1
Manual

1-3
Option

No Name Model Code Q'ty Notes

AC Power
1 NBG-320 NBG-320 1 AC100/220V input
Rectifier
2 Power Cable CFQ-7257-10 CFQ7252-10 1 10m
3 Power Cable CFQ-7257-15 CFQ7252-15 1 15m
3m / 12 cores / serial
4 Data Cable CFQ-5374 CFQ-5374 1
transmission
15m / 12 cores / serial
5 Data Cable CFQ-5374-15 CFQ5374-15 1
transmission
20m / 12 cores / serial
6 Data Cable CFQ-5374-20 CFQ5374-20 1
transmission
3m / 14 cores / serial
7 Data Cable CFQ-5404 CFQ-5404 1
transmission
15m / 14 cores / serial
8 Data Cable CFQ-5404-15 CFQ5404-15 1
transmission
20m / 14 cores / serial
9 Data Cable CFQ-5404-20 CFQ5404-20 1
transmission
10 Ethernet Cable CFQ-5473A CFQ-5473A 1 5m / FTP / straight
11 Ethernet Cable CFQ-5474A CFQ-5474A 1 5m / FTP / cross
Flush Mounting
12 MPBC43664 MPBC43664 1 For front mounting
Kit
13 Printer DPU-414 DPU-414 1
Dual end D-Sub 9 pin
14 Printer Cable 7ZCJD0254A 7ZCJD0254A 1
1.5 m
Dual end D-Sub 9 pin
15 Printer Cable 7ZCJD0270B 7ZCJD0270B 1
10 m
Single end D-Sub 9 pin
16 Printer Cable 7ZCNA4109 7ZCNA4109 1
3m
Single end D-Sub 9 pin
17 Printer Cable 7ZCNA4112 7ZCNA4112 1
10 m
Printer For printer power
18 7ZXJD0076 7ZXJD0076 1
Connection Kit cable extension
112 mm x φ50 mm
19 Printer Paper 6ZCAF00252A 6ZCAF00252 1
25m
Printer Power
20 7ZCJD0257B 7ZCJD0257B 1 1.5m
Cable
15m / 6 cores / serial
21 Extension Cable CFQ-9000 CFQ-9000 1
transmission
22 Junction Box NQE-7700A NQE-7700AA 1
23 Pole Mounting Kit MPBP30608 MPBP30608 1 For NQE-7700A
24 Coaxial Cable Kit NQD-4414 NQD-4414A 1
25 Output Buffer NQA-4251A NQA-4251A 1
26 GPS Select Switch NCZ-777 NCZ777A 1 Manual switch
27 GPS Select Switch NCZ-1573A NCZ-1537A 1 Automatic switch
28 Junction Box CQD-10 CQD-10A 1

1-4
1.4 Construction

 NWZ-4740 Display Unit

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 2.3 Kg

1-5
 JLR-4341 DGPS Sensor Unit

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 1.7 Kg
(Include Cable)

 JLR-4340 GPS Sensor Unit

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 0.7 Kg
(Include Cable)

1-6
 NBG-320 Power Supply

2-φ6(Installation Screw M5)

2-φ6(Installation Screw M5)

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 3.5 Kg

 Flush Mounting Kit

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 0.2 Kg

1-7
 NQE-7700A Junction Box

DGPS Cable
CFQ-8919

Gland 15 f

Cable diameter
φ5～φ11

Gland 25 f

Cable diameter
φ10～φ20

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 0.6 Kg

1-8
 NQD-4414 Coaxial Cable Kit（NQD-4410）

2-φ10(Installation Screw M8)

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 1.5 Kg

 NQD-4414 Coaxial Cable Kit（NQD-4411）

4-φ4(Installation Screw M3)

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 0.7 Kg

1-9
1-10
 NQA-4251A Output Buffer

IEC61162-1
IEC61162-1 NMEA (Output)
NMEA (Output) 24 VDC
Input

IEC61162-1
IEC61162-1 NMEA (Output)
NMEA (Output) IEC61162-1
NMEA (Input)

Unit： mm
Installation Hole

Mass： Approximately 0.8 Kg

 NCZ-777 Select Switch

4-φ7.5(Installation Screw M6)

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 0.5 Kg

 NCZ-777 Select Switch（Flush Mounting）

4-φ7.5(Installation Screw M6)

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 0.7 Kg

1-11
CQD-10 Junction Box

4-φ7.5(Installation Screw M6)

Unit： mm
Mass： Approximately 1.2 Kg

1-12
1.5 System Diagram

JLR-4341 JLR-4340
DGPS Sensor GPS Sensor

NQE-7700A
Junction Box

250V-MPYCYS-7
Extension Cable

CFQ-9002
Data Cable(5m)

GPS/DGPS

CFQ-5374 Radar
DATA
IN/OUT Data Cable(3m) ECDIS／GPS Plotter
Tide Current Calculator
AIS
NWZ-4740
Display CFQ-5473A/5474A
ECDIS
Ethernet Cable (5m) Remote Maintenance
ETHERNET

CFQ-5404 Alarm System

CONTACT Data Cable (3m) External Buzzer
IN/OUT Alarm x 1 ECDIS
Log Pulse x 1

D-Sub9Pin 7ZCJD0254A(1.5m) Printer

or 7ZCJD0270B(10m) DPU-414
DC12/24V
Printer Cable

7ZCJD0257B
CFQ-7257 Power Cable(1.5m)
Power Cable
(2m) DC6V
DC12V

NBG-320
Rectifier

AC 110/220V

DC12/24V

1-13
1-14
 Section 2 Names and Functions of Each Unit
2.1 NWZ-4740 DISPLAY UNIT
 Unit (Front) Buzzer Operation panel

Display
Information received from the GPS receiver, the equipment setting
Control Panel screen, etc. are displayed.
Key Name Function
MOB MOB key Displays the plotting screen, and stores the location where a
crewmember/passenger has fallen in the sea
DISP Display key Changes the display contents on the screen.
MENU Menu key Displays the main menu screen.
Up, Down, These keys scroll the screen and move the cursor.
Left, and Right
keys
1/MARK Numeric keys Enters 1. This key also displays the symbol at the cursor position
on the plotting screen, and stores its position.
2/EVENT Enters 2. This key also displays the symbol at the present
position on the plotting screen, and stores its position.
3/←→ Enters 3. This key also increases the size of the display area on
the plotting screen.
4/＃ Enters 4. This key also prints to printer and sets the print out
interval.
5/GOTO Enters 5. This key also sets the waypoint.
6/→← Enters 6. This key also decreases the size of the display area on
the plotting screen.
7/CURS Enters 7. This key also selects whether to display/hide the
cursor on the plotting screen.
8/AZI Enters 8. This key also selects North Up, Course Up, or Relative
North Up on the plotting screen.
9/HOME Enters 9. This key also moves the own ship's position to the
center on the plotting screen.
0/＊ Enters 0. This key also displays alarm information.
CLR Clear key Cancels operation and clears alarm information.
ENT Enter key Sets the entries.
DIM Dimmer key Adjusts the brightness.
PWR/CONT Power/contrast Turns on the power. This key also adjusts the screen contrast.
key The power is turned off when the DIM and PWR/CONT keys are
pressed at the same time.
2-1
 Reading the Display
The symbols and characters that appear in fixed locations on the screen are described below.
RAIM
Navigator number Displays the preset accuracy level
Main display unit: Displays only the navigator number. In operation:
Sub display unit: and S followed by the subsequent RAIM OFF :
numbers are displayed. No faulty satellite:
RAIM impossible:
Time Display Presence of faulty
Time is displayed in order of hours: minutes: seconds. satellite:
In 12 hour display mode, " " or " " are displayed.
If a time difference is set, "L" is displayed. Otherwise, UTC:"U" is
displayed.
Date Display
Screen Title
The title of the open screen is displayed.
Equipment setting mode
Displayed when the equipment setting
mode is selected
Preset alarm
If a preset alarm occurs, alarm information
is displayed. For ship speed, trip, depth,
and temperature alarms, the
corresponding preset units are displayed.
Arrival: Anchor:
XTD: Boundary:
Ship speed:
Trip: Depth:
Temperature:
Geodetic System
Alarm Information
This is displayed when alarm information
messages have been updated.
Beacon Information Reception Display
This is displayed when meteorological information has been
received from a beacon. A buzzer is generated when this
is displayed.
Magnetic correction
Displayed when magnetic correction is set
Waypoint update
The method for updating the waypoint for the current navigation is displayed.
Automatic update: Manual update:

LAN sharing
Displayed when the active route sharing mode through LAN is selected
Sharing 1 Sharing 2 Sharing 3 Sharing 4 Sharing 5

Alarm Display
Displayed when the number exceeds the configured value.
Position fixing mode
No position fixing: 2D position fixing: 3D position fixing:

Position correction mode

GPS position fixing: Beacon DGPS position fixing: SBAS position fixing:

Demo mode
Displayed when the demo mode is active

2-2
2.2 JLR-4341 DGPS Sensor

Radome

6Pins Connector
Approx. φ19 mm

Base

Mounting Screw
1inch 14UNS-2B

Data Cable 15m

Approx. φ6mm

2.3 JLR-4340 GPS Sensor

Radome

6Pins Connector
Approx. φ19 mm
Base

Mounting Screw
1inch 14UNS-2B
Data Cable 10m
Approx. φ6mm

2-3
2-4
 Section 3 Display Screen
Each screen is detailed in this section.
3.1 Display screen
The screen is switched each time is pressed. Users are allowed to set the screen
displayed when the power is turned on. Users can also determine not to display unnecessary
screens. The navigation information screen, CDI screen, and navigation assistance screen are
provided with sub-screens which can be selected by pressing and/or .
Navigation information screen
This screen displays information such as
the own ship's position.
The sub-screens can be displayed by
pressing and/or .

Plotting screen 1
This screen graphically displays the own
ship's position.

Plotting screen 2
This screen graphically displays the own
ship's position.

Plotting screen 3
3-1
 Plotting screen 2

Plotting screen 3
This screen graphically displays the own
ship's position in full-screen mode.

CDI screen
This screen graphically displays the CDI,
course, speed, and leg.
The highway screen can be displayed by
pressing and/or .

GPS information screen

This screen displays GPS satellite
information.

Waypoint information screen

3-2
 GPS information screen

Waypoint information screen

This screen displays the information of
waypoints on the route.
The information of the next waypoint can
be displayed by pressing and/or
.

Beacon information screen

This screen displays information received
with the beacon receiver.

Navigation assistance screen

This screen displays information such as
the leg and time.
The sub-screens can be displayed by
pressing and/or .

Navigation information screen

3-3
3.1.1 Navigation Information Screen

The navigation information screen displays the position, speed, and course of the own ship. If
there are waypoints, the target waypoint number and estimated arrival time are displayed.
The sub-screens can be displayed by pressing and/or . The sub-screens vary
depending on the presence or absence of waypoints.

(1) If there are waypoints:

Main screen ( 3 digit position screen)

Own ship's position

(latitude and longitude)

Speed
Course

Sub-screen 1 ( 4 digit position screen)

Number of the waypoint Route number

for which the ship is
heading Own ship's position
Speed (latitude and longitude)

Course
Distance from the own ship's
position to the waypoint Bearing from the own ship's
position to the waypoint

Estimated arrival time at

Estimated arrival time
the waypoint
at the final waypoint
Sub-screen 2 (Detail screen)
Number of the waypoint
for which the ship is Own ship's position
heading Speed (latitude and longitude)
Course
Distance from the own
ship's position to the Bearing from the present
waypoint position to the waypoint
Speed of the Speed of the COG component
destination component (See Memo.)
(See Memo.)
Deviation from the route Average bearing
and the steering direction (See Memo.)
L: Steered to the left Estimated arrival time at the
R: Steered to the right Sub-screen 3 (SOG and COG screen) waypoint
Number of the waypoint
for which the ship is Own ship's position
heading (latitude and longitude)
Speed

Course

Estimated arrival time at

the waypoint

3-4
 Memo
VTD (Speed of the destination component)
VTD (An acronym of "Velocity Toward Destination)
This in an index that shows how fast the boat is approaching toward the destination in the
unit of knot when it is navigation at a given bearing angle and speed.

VEAR(Speed of the COG component)

VEAR(An acronym of "Velocity Along Route")
This in an index that shows how fast the vessel is approaching along the planned route in
the unit of knot when it is navigating at a given course and speed.

CMG(Average bearing)
CMG(An acronym of "Course Made Good")
The bearing angle to the current position when viewed from the starting point.

VEAR

VTD = V cos a°
VEAR = V cos b°
CMG = c°

3-5
(2) If there are no waypoints:
If there are no waypoints, only the position, speed, and course of the own ship are displayed.

Main screen ( 3 digit position screen)

Own ship's position

(latitude and longitude)

Speed Course

Sub-screen 1 ( 4 digit position screen)

Own ship's position

(latitude and longitude)

Course
Speed

Sub-screen 2 (SOG and COG screen)

Own ship's position

(latitude and longitude)
Speed

Course

3-6
3.1.2 Plotting Screen 1

The plotting screen 1 displays the course, speed, bearing, and distance at the bottom of the
screen. (Refer to "4.3 PLOT SCREEN OPERATION".)
There are three types of plotting screens, and all the plotting screens display the same
information.
Own ship's position Route
(latitude and longitude) Waypoint symbol
Time
Northerly directions
N UP: North Up
C UP: Course Up
RM N UP: Relative Own ship symbol
North Up
Width of the Mark symbol
starboard-side route Line
Arrival circle Event symbol
Width of the port-side route Scale bar
Speed Course
Bearing from the own
ship's position to the
Distance from the own ship's waypoint
position to the waypoint
3.1.3 Plotting Screen 2

The plotting screen 2 displays the course, speed, bearing, and distance on the left side of the
screen. (Refer to "4.3 PLOT SCREEN OPERATION".)
There are three types of plotting screens, and all the plotting screens display the same
information.

Speed

Course
Distance from the own ship's
position to the waypoint

Bearing from the own ship's

position to the waypoint

3.1.4 Plotting Screen 3

The plotting screen 3 displays information in full-screen mode. (Refer to "4.3 PLOT SCREEN
OPERATION".)
There are three types of plotting screens, and all the plotting screens display the same
information. Cursor position
(latitude and longitude)

Distance and bearing from the

own ship's position to the
cursor position
Cursor
Velocity vector

Grid line Own ship symbol

Track Distance circle from

the own ship

3-7
3.1.5 CDI Screen

The CDI screen can graphically display the CDI, course, speed, and leg.
The highway screen can be displayed by pressing and/or .

If the heading is input, and heading (HDG) is displayed.

Time
Own ship's position
(latitude and longitude) CDI screen Leg distance indicator bar
: Traveled distance
: Remaining distance
▼Bearing from the
own ship's position
to the waypoint Remaining distance
▼Planned ship speed
(Refer to "4.5 ROUTE
Δ Course PLANNING".)
Speed
Width of the
Width of the starboard-side route
port-side route
Route deviation indicator bar

Own ship symbol Center of the route

Deviation from the route

The highway screen displays information in Course Up mode while the own ship's position is
fixed, so the route turns when the own ship turns. As a result, the route may not be displayed
depending on the course.

Own ship's position

Deviation from the route (latitude and longitude)
and the steering direction Time
: Steered to the left Highway screen
: Steered to the right
Waypoint direction

Next waypoint
Up to 10 waypoints can
Speed be displayed.
Course Next leg
Up to 10 legs can be
Distance from the own displayed.
ship's position to the Waypoint
waypoint Route
Bearing from the own LEG
ship's position to the
waypoint Scale bar
Width of the
starboard-side route
Width of the Own ship symbol
port-side route

The highway screen's scale can be changed by pressing or . The scale width is the
same as the plot screen's. Please refer to "4.3.3 Zooming the Screen In and Out".
When GC is selected as the distance calculation method, only one waypoint can be displayed.

3-8
3.1.6 GPS Information Screen

The GPS information screen displays the receiving status of GPS satellites and beacon.
GPS satellite number
GPS satellite location Unframed: Search
and the receiving status : Completion of
Unframed: Search demodulation
{: Completion of : Use of position fixing
demodulation GPS signal intensity bar
z: Use of position fixing 45 to 55 under normal
conditions
Beacon frequency Beacon bit rate
Beacon SNR
Beacon signal intensity
Beacon error rate

GPS HDOP
Antenna height

3.1.7 Waypoint Information Screen

The waypoint information screen displays the information of waypoints on the route.
The information of the next waypoint can be displayed by pressing and/or .
To display the final waypoint, press and hold and . To display the current waypoint,
press and hold and .
Waypoint number
No display: Current
waypoint Waypoint symbol n-th waypoint
NEXT: Next waypoint Total number of waypoints
Fin: Final waypoint
PAST: Waypoint passed Distance from the own ship's
position to the displayed waypoint
Comment on
the waypoint Expected arrival time at
Waypoint position the displayed waypoint
Bearing from the own
ship's position to the
Time required for reaching
displayed waypoint
the displayed waypoint
Width of the
port-side route Arrival-circle radius
Width of the
starboard-side route Planned ship speed

3.1.8 Beacon Information Screen

The beacon information screen displays message type16 information received by the beacon
receiver. (Refer to "4.13 BEACON INFORMATION".)

Display area

Use and/or
to scroll the screen.

3-9
 3.1.9 Navigation Assistance Screen

The navigation assistance screen calculates and displays navigation information such as the
navigation start and end, leg distance, and total time. (Refer to "4.12 NAVIGATION
ASSISTANCE".)
The trip calculation screen, the external equipment display screen, and the screen for calculating
the distance/bearing between two points can be displayed by pressing and/or .
Navigation assistance screen 1
Own ship's position (measurement for navigation)
(latitude and longitude) RUNNING: Measurement in
progress
Speed No display: Measurement complete
Measurement start Course
time Total time
Measurement Total distance over ground
end time
Total distance through water

Navigation assistance screen 2 RUNNING: Measurement in progress

(water/ground trip calculation) No display: Measurement complete
Measurement Measurement start time
end time
Trip data for SOG
Total time Trip
Average speed
RUNNING: Measurement in progress
Measurement start time No display: Measurement complete
Measurement end time
Total time Trip data for STW

Average speed Trip

Navigation assistance screen 3 Bow speed through water
Forward/backward (external equipment display) ◄: Leftward ►: Rightward
speed through water
▲: Forward Stern speed through
▼: Backward water
Water ◄: Leftward
Water depth temperature ►: Rightward
Current speed
Current direction
Layer A Water depth for current
Layer B measurement
Layer C

Navigation assistance screen 4

(calculation of a distance/bearing between two points)

Starting point
(latitude and longitude)

Terminal point
(latitude and longitude)
Distance calculation
Distance method
GC: Great circle sailing
Bearing RL: Rhumb line sailing

3-10
 Section 4 Operation
4.1 Menu List
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Range Reference
1.DISPLAY 1.CONTRAST 1-7-13 4.14.1
2.DIMMER 1-9-10 4.14.2
-MAXIMUM-
3 -TYPICAL- 1-6-10
4. -MINIMUM- 1-4-10
5.CLICK SOUND ON/OFF 4.14.3
6.REVERSING NORMAL/REVERSE1 4.14.4
MODE / REVERSE2
7.INPUT ASSIST ON/OFF 4.14.5
8.DISPLAY SELECT 1.NAV ON/START/OFF 4.14.6
2.PLOT 1 ON/START/OFF
3.PLOT 2 ON/START/OFF
4.PLOT 3 ON/START/OFF
5. CDI ON/START/OFF
6. GPS INFO ON/START/OFF
7.WPT INFO ON/OFF
8.BEACON INFO ON/OFF
9.NAV ASSIST ON/OFF
2.PLOT 1.WPT ○ etc. 4.4.3
2.MARK ● etc. 4.3.9.3
3.EVENT □ etc.
4.TRACK PERIOD OFF/TIME/DIST 4.3.8.1
5.TRACK ・ etc. 4.3.8.2
6.LINE ― etc. 4.3.10.3
7. EVENT/MARKLIST 4.7.1
8.DELETE EVENT/ 1.DELETE 4.7.4
MARK/TRACK EVENT/MARK LIST
2.DELETE ALL EVENT
3.DELETE ALL MARK
4.DELETE ALL
EVENT/MARK
5.DELETE TRACK 4.3.8.3
8.VISIBLE/INVISIBLE 1.WPT ON/OFF 4.3.12
2.WPT No. ON/OFF
3.MARK ON/OFF
4.EVENT ON/OFF
5.EVENT/MARK No. ON/OFF
6.TRACK ON/OFF
7.LINE ON/OFF
8.ARRIVAL CIRCLE ON/LEG/OFF
9.XTD ON/LEG/OFF
0.NEXT PAGE
1.SCALE BAR ON/OFF
2.SYMBOL INFO ON/OFF
3.CURSOR INFO ON/OFF
4.GRID LINE ON/OFF
5.GRID LAT ON/OFF
6.GRID LON ON/OFF
0.PREVIOUS PAGE
0.NEXT PAGE
1.CURSOR LARGE/MIDDLE/SMA 4.3.1.4
LL
2.OWN CIRCLE OFF/0.1-9.9NM 4.3.11.1
3.OWN VECTOR OFF/0.1-9.9 min 4.3.11.2
0.PREVIOUS PAGE

4-1
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Range Reference
3.WPT/ROUTE 1.ENTRY WPT/ 4.4.1/4.4.2
WPT LIST
2.MAKE ROUTE/ 4.5.1/4.5.2
ROUTE LIST
3.ROUTE 1.LEG CHANGE AUTO/MANUAL 4.6.1/4.6.3.2
START/END 2.DIRECTION ORDER/REVERSE
3.NAVIGATION START/END
4.COPY 1.WPT COPY 4.4.5
WPT/ROUTE 2.ROUTE COPY 4.5.4
5.DELETE 1.WPT DEL 4.4.6
WPT/ROUTE 2.ROUTE DEL 4.5.5
6. TRANSFER 1.OUT / IN 4.5.6
WPT/ROUTE (LAN) 2.CONNECT /
FROM IP
3.TO IP
4.PORT No.
5.FORMAT
6.OUT TYPE
0.START
7.DEFAULT 1.WIDTH PORT OFF/0.01-9.99NM 4.5.7
SETTINGS 2.WIDTH STBD OFF/0.01-9.99NM
3.ARRIVAL RAD OFF/0.01-9.99NM
4.SPEED OFF/0.01-99.99kn
5.SAIL GC/RL GC/RL
6.SOG SMOOTHING OFF/1-99 sec
4.ALARM 1.ARRIVAL/ANCHOR OFF/ARV/ANC 4.11.1
2.XTD/BOUNDARY OFF/XTD/
BOUNDARY
3. DGPS OFF/ON→OFF/
OFF→ON/
ON  OFF
4. HDOP OFF/1-20
5.TEMP OFF/OVER/UNDER
/ IN RANGE
/ OUT RANGE
6.DPTH OFF/OVER/UNDER
/ IN RANGE
/ OUT RANGE
7.TRIP OFF/OVER
8.SPD OFF/OVER/UNDER
/ IN RANGE
/ OUT RANGE
0.ALARM SOUND 1.SYSTEM OFF/1/2/3 4.11.2
SET 2.ARRIVAL/ANCHOR OFF/1/2/3
3.XTD/BOUNDARY OFF/1/2/3
4. DGPS OFF/4/5/6
5. HDOP OFF/1/2/3/4/5/6
6.TEMP OFF/1/2/3/4/5/6
7.DPTH OFF/1/2/3/4/5/6
8.TRIP OFF/1/2/3/4/5/6
9.SPEED OFF/1/2/3/4/5/6

4-2
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Range Reference
5.SYSTEM 1.TIME DIFF -13:30－13:30 4.15.1
2.DATE DISP 'YY-MM-DD/ 4.15.2
DD MM,'YY/
MM DD,'YY
3.TIME DISP 24hr/12hr 4.15.3
4.DATUM WGS84 etc. 4.15.4
5.UNIT - NM,kn 4.15.5
DIST/SPEED km,km/h
mi,mi/h
6. HEIGHT, DEPTH m/ft/fm 4.15.6
7. TEMPERATURE ℃/℉ 4.15.7
8.MAG CORR OFF/AUTO/MANUAL 4.15.8
9.SPEED METER 10-100kn 4.15.9
6. GPS/BEACON/ 1.GPS MODE AUTO/GPSALONE 4.16.1
SBAS / SBAS/BEACON
2.FIX MODE AUTO/2D/3D 4.16.2
3.SAT ELV MASK 5-89 Degrees 4.16.3
4. HDOP 4/10/20 4.16.4
5.SMOOTHING 0-99 sec 4.16.5
POSITION
SPEED 0-99 sec
COURSE 0-99 sec
6. RAIM ACCURACY OFF/10/30/50/100 4.16.6
LEVEL
7. GPS 1.LATITUDE 4.16.7
INITIALIZATION 2.LONGITUDE
3.ANT HEIGHT
4.DATE
5.TIME
0.SET
8.BEACON/SBAS 1.STATION SELECT AUTO/MANUAL 4.16.8
2.FREQUENCY 283.5-325.0kHz
3.BIT RATE 50/100/200bps
4. BEACON ON/OFF
INFORMATION
6.SBAS SEARCH AUTO/MANUAL
7. TYPE0 ON/OFF
INFORMATION
8.RANGING ON/OFF
9.LORAN 1.LORAN A/C OFF/LORAN A/ 4.16.9
LORAN C
LORAN A
1.LORAN A/C
2.STN SELECT STN 1
3. STN 2
4. TD CORR TD1
5. TD2
LORAN C
1.LORAN A/C
2. GRI CHAIN
3. TD DATA TD1
4. DATA TD2
5. TD CORR TD1
6. TD2
7.VERSION 4.17
8.LANGUAGE 1.LANGUAGE JAPAN/ 4.18
ENGLISH

4-3
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Range Reference
0.EQUIP SET 1.DISPLAY TYPE MAIN/SUB 4.20.1
2.SENSOR No. 1-9 4.20.2
3. CCRP 1.SHIP ENABLE/DISABLE 4.20.3
2.BEAM 1.0-70.0m
3.LENGTH 1.0-700.0m
4.SENSOR ENABLE/DISABLE
5.X -35.0-+35.0m
6.Y 0.0-700.0m
7.CCRP ENABLE/DISABLE
8.X -35.0-+35.0m
9.Y 0.0-700.0m
4.CHECK OFF/INPUT DATA / 4.20.4
DIAGNOSIS/ERROR
LOG /
CONFG OUT
5.RESET OFF/ALL/SENSOR/ 4.20.5
DISPLAY
6.DEMO 1.DEMO TYPE STATIC/ 4.20.6
STRAIGHT /
RIGHT/LEFT/
ROUTE/AUTO
2.DATE
3.TIME
4.LATITUDE
5.LONGITUDE
6.SPEED
7.COURSE
8.RADIUS
9.ROUTE
0.START
7.DATA I/O 1.DATA IN/OUT1 NMEA/JRC/IEC/ 4.20.7.1
ROUTE/SWITCH/
PRINTER
2.DATA OUT2 NMEA/JRC/IEC/ 4.20.7.2
ROUTE/SWITCH
3.DATA OUT3 NMEA/JRC/IEC/ 4.20.7.3
ROUTE/SWITCH
4.DATA IN/OUT4 NMEA/JRC/IEC/ 4.20.7.4/
ROUTE/SWITCH/ 4.20.7.8
EXT EQUIP
5.CONTACT OUTPUT ALARM ACK/SYSTEM 4.20.7.5
1 /SYS+XTD+ARV/XTD/
ARV/XTD+ARV
200p/NM/400p/NM
6.CONTACT OUTPUT ALARM ACK/SYSTEM 4.20.7.6
2 /SYS+XTD+ARV/XTD/
ARV/XTD+ARV
200p/NM/400p/NM
7. LAN ACTIVE ROUTE/ 4.20.7.7
DATA ROUTE/
MUTUAL/DATA OUT/
REMOTE MAINTE
8.SOFT UPDATE 1.UPDATE AREA DISPLAY/
SENSOR
2.BIT RATE SENSOR
AUTO
DISPLAY
38400/57600/
115200bps
3.UPDATE STANDBY
9. IP 1. IP ADDR DEFAULT/INPUT 4.20.8
2.SUBNET MASK DEFAULT/INPUT
3.DEFAYLT GATWAY DEFAULT/INPUT

4-4
4.2 Basic Operation

4.2.1 Turning the Unit On

Press the button to turn the unit power on. System initialization will start.
Once initialization has been completed, self-diagnosis will start, and once the equipment's status
has been confirmed, the screen will switch to the standard screen.

Attention
If the unit cannot be turned on, check the main power supply and the connection of
display unit cable.

Unit Initialization Self-Diagnosis Screen

(Display Unit Diagnosis)

(Sensor Setting Confirmation)

Memo

Press the key to stop self-diagnosis and return to the standard screen.

4.2.1.1 Startup (Standard)

If the self-diagnosis results are all "OK", the unit automatically switches to the standard screen.

Self-Diagnosis Standard Screen

4-5
4.2.1.2 Startup (Error-1)

If any of the self-diagnosis results are "NG", the results are displayed.
The unit does not switch to the standard screen unless the key is pressed.

Attention
If any errors (NG) are detected, please contact JRC or an affiliate.

4.2.1.3 Startup (Error-2)

Messages shown below may be displayed during sensor diagnostics.

The message appears when display unit and sensor configuration settings do not match, such as
when equipment has been replaced.
When this occurs, select one of the items, and press the key to perform it.

[ 1. USE SENSOR CONFIG.]: Replaces display configuration with the sensor configuration.
[ 2. USE DISPLAY CONFIG.]: Replaces the sensor configuration with the display configuration.

Attention
Consult with JRC or its affiliate if this is displayed frequently.

4-6
4.2.1.4 Startup (Error-3)

If the following screen is displayed after the unit is turned on, press the key and
key simultaneously to turn off the power.

Attention
Contact JRC or its affiliate.

4.2.2 Turning the Unit Off

If the key and key are pressed and held down simultaneously, the power will be
turned off and the screen display will turn off.

4-7
4.2.3 Adjusting the Backlight

The brightness of the display can be set to one of four levels (bright, medium, dark, off).
The brightness is set to medium when the unit is turned on.
The brightness cycles in the following order when the button is pressed: Bright  Medium
 Dark  Off  Dark  Medium  Bright...

Memo
· Level settings can be performed for all brightness levels except "Off". (Refer to "4.14
Display Settings")
· The key panel brightness changes in accordance with the display brightness.

4.2.4 Adjusting the Contrast

The contrast of the display can be set to one of 13 levels.

Each time the button is pressed, the current contrast will decrease, and once the
minimum contrast is reached, the contrast will increase.

4-8
4.2.5 Stopping the Alarm Buzzer

The buzzer can be stopped by pressing the key.

The buzzer sounds when one of the following occurs.
· Position measurement is interrupted
· An error occurs

Memo
· Mutual Acknowledgement Function
When positioning is stopped and the buzzer sounds, the mutual acknowledgement
function can be used to stop the buzzer from another unit. To use this function, units
must be connected via contact input / output or ALR, ACK sentences.

4.2.6 Changing the Display

Each time the key is pressed, the screen display changes. (Refer to "3.1 Display
Screen")

4.2.7 Displaying Alarm Information

Each time the key is pressed, the screen display changes.

When alarm information is updated, the * symbol appears on the status bar.

Alarm Number

Alarm Occurrence Alarm

Date/Time Information
Alarm Contents Display Area
A: Alarm Occurred
V: Alarm Recovered
ACK: Acknowledgement

Alarm Information Refresh Mark

Memo
· If no alarm has occurred, "NO ALARMS" is displayed.

4-9
4.3 Plot Screen Operation

4.3.1 Cursor Operation

Cursor Information
Cursor Latitude and Longitude

Cursor Distance from Own ship to Cursor

Bearing from Own ship to Cursor

Own ship

4.3.1.1 Displaying the Cursor

· Cursor display can be turned off and on.

· When the cursor is displayed, cursor information (cursor latitude and longitude, bearing and
distance from ship to cursor) will be shown on the top right of the screen.

Procedure

1. Press the key on the plot screen to display the cursor.

2. To hide the cursor, press the key again.

To automatically hide cursor information when the cursor has not moved for 10 seconds, set
"CURSOR INFO" to "OFF" as directed in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen Symbols". Set it to "ON"
to always display cursor information.

4.3.1.2 Moving the Cursor

· The cursor can be moved up, down, left, right, and diagonally.

Procedure

1. Use to move the cursor up, down, left, and right.

Press , , , or simultaneously to move the cursor

diagonally. Holding the buttons down will cause the screen to accelerate while continuing its
movement.

4-10
4.3.1.3 Centering the Cursor Position

· The position of the cursor can be displayed at the center of the screen.

Procedure

1. Display the cursor.

2. Move the cursor to the point on the screen which you want to be centered.
3. Press .
The position the cursor was at will be moved to the center of the screen.

4.3.1.4 Changing Cursor Size

· The cursor size can be set to one of 3 sizes.

Procedure

1. Press , then , then to display the "PLOT SET2" Screen.

2. Press "CURSOR".

3. Use to select the size, and then press .

4.3.2 Moving the Screen

· The screen can be moved up, down, left, right, and diagonally

Procedure

1. If the cursor is displayed, press to hide the cursor.

2. Press to move the screen up, down, left, or right.

Press , , or simultaneously to move the screen

diagonally. Holding the buttons down will cause the screen to accelerate while continuing its
movement.

4-11
4.3.3 Zooming the Screen In and Out

· The plot screen width can be changed to any of the widths below.
0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0, 100.0, 200.0, 300.0[NM]

Procedure

1. Each time is pressed, the screen will zoom in (a narrower area will be displayed).

2. Each time is pressed, the screen will zoom out (a wider area will be displayed).
A scale bar is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
To turn off the scale bar, turn the "SCALE BAR" "OFF" as described in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot
Screen Symbols".

4.3.4 Selecting North Up, Course Up, Relative North Up

· The screen mode can be switched between north up, course up, and relative north up.
North Up: The top of the screen shows north, and own ship moves.
Course Up: The top of the screen shows the direction of the route of own ship, and the
surroundings move.
Relative North Up: The top of the screen shows north, the ship is fixed, and the surroundings
move.

Procedure

1. Press .

Each time the key is pressed, selection rotates as follows:

"N UP" → "C UP" → "RM N UP"

The top left of the screen displays the direction of north and the screen mode.

4.3.5 Centering the Screen on the Ship

· The ship can be displayed at the center of the screen.

Procedure

1. If the cursor is displayed, press to hide the cursor.

2. Press .
Own ship will be displayed at the center of the screen.

Memo
· When own ship reaches the edge of the screen, the screen will automatically reposition
the display such that own ship is at the center of the screen. When Course Up is
selected, own ship will be displayed somewhat below the center of the screen.

4-12
4.3.6 Waypoint Symbol Display

· The symbols and numbers of waypoints registered in the waypoint list are displayed on the plot
screen.
· Up to 1000 waypoints can be displayed on one screen.
· To turn off waypoint symbol display, set "WPT" to "OFF" as described in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot
Screen Symbols".

4.3.6.1 Displaying Waypoint Information

Waypoint information can be displayed by moving the cursor to the waypoint and leaving it in
place for 1 second or longer.
If the cursor is moved off of the waypoint, the waypoint information will be hidden.
The following waypoint information is shown.

· For waypoints on route

Symbol shape, number, comments, latitude, longitude, arrival circle radius, port route width,
starboard route width, bearing from own ship, distance, estimated time of arrival.

· For waypoints off route Symbol shape, number, comments, latitude, longitude
Route Waypoint Information
Symbol

Waypoint Number
Comment
Waypoint
Position
Port Route Width Route
Starboard Route Width
Arrival Circle Radius
Planned Speed Waypoint
Bearing From Own Ship
Distance From Own Ship Cursor
Estimated Time of
Arrival

Waypoint No.

Symbol
Comment
Waypoint
Waypoint
Position information
of waypoints
not on route

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the waypoint symbol.

Leave the cursor in place for 1 second or longer, and the waypoint information will be
displayed.

4-13
4.3.6.2 Editing Waypoint Symbols

· Waypoint symbol shapes and comments can be edited, but the symbols on the active route or
sharing route can not be edited.
· Waypoint symbols can also be edited from the menu. Please refer to "4.4.4 Editing Waypoint
Information".

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the waypoint symbol and display the
waypoint information.
3. Press to display the edit screen.

Edit Screen

(1) To Change Symbol Shape

4. Press "SYMBOL".

5. Press to select the shape, and press .

Symbol Shape List

(2) To Change Comment

6. Press "COMMENT" and enter the comment.

Please refer to "4.9 Entering Comments" for instructions on how to enter comments.
7. Press "EDIT FIN".

4-14
4.3.6.3 Deleting Waypoint Symbols

Waypoints can be deleted.

Deleted waypoints will also be deleted from the waypoint list. However, waypoints on the active
route will be deleted from the route, but will not be deleted from the waypoint list (skip). For
details regarding skipping, refer to "4.3.7.3 Skipping Route Waypoints".
Deletion is also possible from the menu. Please refer to "4.4.6 Deleting Waypoints".

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the waypoint symbol and display the
waypoint information.
3. Press .

4.3.7 Route Display

· When navigation starts, the active route, arrival circle, and route width are displayed on the plot
screen.
· To hide the arrival circle and route width, set "ARRIVAL CIRCLE" and "XTD" to "OFF" as
directed in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen Symbols".
· To display only the arrival circle and route width for the LEG, set "ARRIVAL CIRCLE" and
"XTD" to "LEG" as described in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen Symbols". If set to "ON", the arrival
circles and route widths for each LEG will be displayed.
· Arrival circles and route widths for routes for which navigation is underway cannot be edited.
· Refer to "4.5.2 Creating Routes" for information regarding how to create routes.
· Refer to "4.6 Performing Navigation" for information regarding how to perform navigation.

4-15
4.3.7.1 Displaying Route Information

If the cursor is moved onto a route, and left in place for 1 second or longer, the route information
will be displayed.
If the cursor is moved off the route, the route information will be hidden.
The route information displayed consists of the route number and comments.
Only the active route can be displayed.
Route
Information

Route Number
Comment

Route
Cursor

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the route.

Leave the cursor in place for 1 second or longer, and the route information will be displayed.

4.3.7.2 Editing Route Information

Route comments can be edited. However, shared routes cannot be edited.

Editing is also possible from the menu. Please refer to "4.5.3 Editing Routes".
Only the active route can be displayed.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the route, and display the route information.

3. Press to display the edit screen.

4. Press "COMMENT" and enter the comment.

Please refer to "4.9 Entering Comments" for instructions on how to enter comments.
6. Press "EDIT FIN".

4-16
4.3.7.3 Skipping Route Waypoints

Waypoints on routes can be skipped.

Waypoints on sharing route can not be skipped.
If skipped, they will disappear from the route, and a route connecting the previous and next
waypoints will be created, but the waypoint will not be deleted from the route planning.
Skipping is also possible from the menu. Please refer to "4.5.3.1 Changing Waypoint
Information".
Waypoints which have already been passed cannot be skipped.
Once skipped, the skipped state will be retained, and the waypoint will be skipped again if the
same route is performed. To set a waypoint which has been skipped to no longer be skipped, set
the waypoint information "STATE" setting to "USE" as directed in "4.5.3.1 Changing Waypoint
Information".
The only route which can be displayed is the active route.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the waypoint on the route, and display the
waypoint information.
3. Press .

Skipped waypoint
A route will be automatically created connecting the
waypoints immediately before and after the skipped
waypoint.

Skip current
waypoint 0003

Route change from 0002 to 0004

Route before skipping Skip 0004

Progressing from 0002 to
0003

Skipped waypoint

Route change from 0003 to 0005

4-17
4.3.8 Track Display

· The own ship's track can be displayed.

· A maximum of 2000 points of track can be stored. Once this number is exceeded, old track
points will be automatically deleted.
· To turn off track display, set "TRACK" to "OFF" as described in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen
Symbols".

Track

Own ship

4.3.8.1 Setting the Track Period

Memory intervals can be set to units of time or of distance.

The following periods can be set:
Time: Can be set in 1 second increments between 1 and 60 minutes.
Distance: Can be set in 0.01 NM increments between 0.01 and 99.99 NM.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then and select "TRACK PERIOD".

2. Press to select either "TIME" or "DIST", and press .

3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the period, and press .

Memo
· If the period is set to "OFF", track memory will be deactivated. Previously stored data
will be retained.

4-18
4.3.8.2 Changing Track Line Type

The track line type (dots, line, dotted line) can be selected.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then and select "TRACK".

2. Press to select the line type, and press .

Line Type List

4.3.8.3 Deleting Tracks

All tracks can be deleted.

Partial deletion cannot be performed.

Procedure

1. Press , , , and then , and select "DELETE TRACK".

4-19
4.3.9 Event and Mark Symbol Display

· Events and marks registered in the event/mark list can be displayed on the plot screen.
Event: When the event key is pressed, a symbol is displayed at the own ship's position, and is
registered in the event/mark list.
Mark: When the mark key is pressed, a symbol is displayed at the cursor position, and is
registered in the event/mark list.
· Up to a total of 1000 symbols (including MOB and line change points) can be registered and
displayed.
· To disable event and mark display, set "EVENT" and "MARK" to "OFF" as described in "4.3.12
Hiding Plot Screen Symbols".

4.3.9.1 Entering Events

Event symbols are displayed at the own ship's position on the plot screen, and are registered to
the event/mark list.
They are registered to the event/mark list in ascending numerical order.

Procedure

1. Press .

Memo
· As long as the menu screen, waypoint information screen, or navigation assistance 4
screen are not displayed, the ship's position can be registered by pressing the
button without exiting the plot screen.

4.3.9.2 Entering Marks

Mark symbols are displayed at the cursor position on the plot screen, and are registered to the
event/mark list.
They are registered to the event/mark list in ascending numerical order.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Move the cursor to the position you wish to register, and press .

Memo

· If is pressed without displaying the cursor on the plot screen, an event symbol
will be displayed at the own ship's position, and registration will occur.

4-20
4.3.9.3 Changing Event/Mark Shapes

The default symbol types of events and marks displayed when setting events or marks can be
selected. Individually selected symbol types are not changed.

Procedure

(1) Changing Event Symbol Shape

1. Press , , and then , and select "EVENT".

2. Press to select the shape, and press .

(2) Changing Mark Symbol Shape

1. Press , , and then , and select "MARK".

2. Press to select the shape, and press .

Symbol Shape List

4.3.9.4 Displaying Event/Mark Information

· Event and mark information can be displayed.

· The following event information is displayed.
Event symbol, event number, comment, latitude, longitude, registration date and time
When an external unit is connected, the water temperature, depth, and current at the time of
registration.
· The following mark information is displayed.
Mark symbol, mark number, comment, latitude, longitude, registration date and time
· Move the cursor to the event or mark symbol, and leave the cursor there for 1 second or longer
to display the event or mark information.
· If the cursor is moved off of the event or mark symbol, the event or mark information will be
hidden.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the event or mark symbol.

Leave the cursor in place for 1 second or longer, and the event or mark information will be
displayed.

4-21
 Event Information
Symbol
Event/Mark Number

Comment
Event Position
Entry Date/Time
Cursor
Water Temperature
Water Depth
Current Event Symbol

Event Information

Symbol Mark Information

Event/Mark Number

Comment
Mark Position

Entry Date/Time
Cursor

Mark Symbol

Mark Information

Memo
· Event and mark information can also be displayed from the event/mark list.
Please refer to "4.7.3 Editing Event and Mark Information".

4-22
4.3.9.5 Editing Event/Mark Information

Event and mark symbol shapes and comments can be edited.

Procedure
Procedur

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the event or mark symbol, and the event or
mark information will be displayed.
3. Press to display the edit screen.

Event / Mark Editing Screen

(1) To Change Symbol Shape

4. Press "SYMBOL".

5. Press to select the shape, and press .

Symbol Shape List

(2) To Change Comment

6. Press "COMMENT" and enter the comment.

Please refer to "4.9 Entering Comments" for instructions on how to enter comments.
8. Press "EDIT FIN".

Memo
· Event and mark information can also be edited from the event/mark list.
Please refer to "4.7.3 Editing Event and Mark Information".

4-23
4.3.9.6 Registering Event/Mark Positions to the Waypoint List

Event and mark positions can be registered to the waypoint list.

This enables them to be used as waypoints.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the event or mark symbol you wish to
register to the waypoint list, and display the event or mark information.
3. Press to display the edit screen.

4. Press "ENTRY FOR WPT".

5. The waypoint list will be displayed. Select the number of the waypoint you wish to register,
and press .
Please refer to "4.8 List Screen Operation" for details regarding how to select waypoint
numbers.

4.3.9.7 Deleting Event/Mark Symbols

Registered events and marks can be deleted.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the event or mark symbol you wish to delete, and display
the event or mark information.
3. Press .

Memo
· Event and mark symbols can also be deleted from the event/mark list.
Please refer to "4.7.4 Deleting Event/Mark Information".

4-24
4.3.10 Line Display

· Lines can be drawn between any two points on the plot screen.
· To turn off line display, set "LINE" to "OFF" as described in "4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen
Symbols".

4.3.10.1 Drawing Lines

The cursor is used to set start and end points on the plot screen, and a line is drawn connecting
them.
Line start and end points can be registered as marks in the event/mark list.
If is pressed before an end point is selected, the previous inflection point is deleted.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the start point, and press .

3. Press to move the cursor to the end point, and press .

4. At the same position as the end point, press again.

If steps 2 and 3 are repeated before step 4, a line will be drawn using the end point as an
inflection point.

①Move the cursor to the start point

and press the ENT key.
③Move the cursor to the
inflection point and press
the ENT key.

②Move the cursor to the

inflection point and press the
ENT key.

④Move the cursor to the

end point and press the ENT
key twice.

4-25
4.3.10.2 Deleting Lines

If an inflection point on a line is deleted, the inflection points before and after it will be connected.
Entire lines can also be deleted.

Procedure

1. Press , and display the cursor.

2. Press to move the cursor to the inflection point you wish to delete, and
display the mark information.
3. Pressing will display the following. Select one or all points to be deleted, and press

The following is an overview of the display.

ONE: Delete only the selected inflection point, and connect the points immediately before
and after it.
ALL: Delete the selected line.
CANCEL: Cancel deletion.
Mark Information
1 Point Deletion Selected

Key

Move the cursor to the The inflection point is deleted, and the preceding
inflection point. and following inflection points are connected.

Memo
· If a line consists of only a start point and an end point, if either are deleted, the entire
line will be deleted.
· Inflection points are registered in the event/mark list as marks, and as such can be
deleted by deleting the mark. Please refer to "4.7.4 Deleting Event/Mark Symbols" for
details regarding how to perform deletion.

4-26
4.3.10.3 Changing Line Types

The line type can be changed.

Line types can be set for each line, but cannot be changed after the line has been set.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and select "LINE".

2. Press to select the line type, and press .

Line Type List

4.3.11 Own Ship Display

· The distance circle from own ship, and the ship's vector, are displayed.
· The own ship symbol cannot be changed.

4.3.11.1 Displaying the Distance Circle

A circle, centered on own ship, is displayed by specifying the radius.

Settings can be made between 0.1 and 9.9 NM.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and select "OWN CIRCLE".

2. Press to select "SET", and press .

3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the distance radius [NM], and press .

4.3.11.2 Displaying the Own Ship Vector

Setting the time allows the vector line to the point own ship will arrive at in the set time to be
displayed.
Settings can be made between 0.1 and 9.9 minutes.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and select "OWN VECTOR".

2. Press to select "SET", and press .

3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the time [min], and press .

4-27
4.3.12 Hiding Plot Screen Symbols

· Individual symbols on the plot screen can be hidden.

· Set symbols to "OFF" to hide them.
· Set symbols to "ON" to display them.
· The following symbols can be set:
Waypoints, waypoint numbers, marks, events, event / mark numbers, tracks, lines, arrival
circles, route widths, scale bars, symbol information, cursor position information, grid lines,
grid latitude, grid longitude.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and select "VISIBLE/INVISIBLE".

Press "NEXT PAGE" for items which are not displayed.

2. Use the numeric keypad to select the item to hide.
3. Press "OFF", and then press .

Memo
· If mark or event are pressed when marks or events are hidden, marks and events will
be displayed.
· If GOTO is used to create a temporary route with the cursor when waypoints are
hidden, waypoints will be displayed.
· If a line is drawn when lines are hidden, lines will be displayed.

4-28
4.4 Registering Waypoints
· Waypoints must be registered to the waypoint list to start navigation.
· Up to 10000 waypoints can be registered in this unit.
· The waypoint list is divided into 3 regions, managed via numbering from 1 - 11024.
1 - 10000: Waypoints registered in this unit.
10001 - 10512: Waypoints on shared active routes sent by ECDIS are registered.
10513 - 11024: Waypoints used in temporary routes are registered.
· Numbers 1 - 10512 are saved, and remain even if the power is turned off. 10513 - 11024 are
not saved, and will disappear if the power is turned off.
· Waypoints can be set between 89 degrees north and 89 degrees south.

4.4.1 Displaying the Waypoint List

Registered waypoints (waypoint number 1 - 10000) can be displayed.

Waypoint number 00001 is registered as "HOME PORT".

Waypoint number of Waypoint entry number/total

cursor position number of waypoints

Up/Down
Scroll

Waypoint position
HOME PORT
Waypoint No.
Symbol
Comment

"NEW"
Waypoint input
from external
source
Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and display the waypoint list.

Memo
· The position registered as HOME in the waypoint list can be easily set as the waypoint
using the GOTO function.
It is convenient to register a frequently used waypoint (such as the home port) as
HOME.
Please refer to "4.6.2 Starting Navigation with the GOTO Key" for details regarding the
GOTO function.
· The waypoint on the route entered from an external device is displayed NEW at the
extreme right of the waypoint list and then registered. The NEW is displayed when a
waypoint on the next route has been entered or until the power is shut off.

4-29
4.4.2 Registering Waypoints

The following 5 positions can be registered in the waypoint list.

(1) Own ship position
(2) Specified latitude and longitude
(3) Cursor position
(4) Position defined by a bearing and distance from a specified point
(5) A position registered in the event/mark list
Up to 10000 points can be registered.

To register, first display the waypoint registration screen.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and display the waypoint list.

2. Move the cursor to the number you wish to register, and press .

To move the cursor to the desired number, you can use the following methods:
(1) Move with the up and down keys
(2) Enter the desired number with the numeric keypad
(3) Jump to a number without registered contents
Please refer to "4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number" for details.

3. The waypoint registration screen will be displayed.

Select waypoint position

Enter latitude and longitude with

numeric keypad and register

Register current own ship position

Register cursor position
Register bearing and distance
Register from event/mark list

4-30
4.4.2.1 Registering the Own Ship Position

The own ship position can be registered to the waypoint list.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" and display the waypoint registration screen.
2. Press "POSITION".

3. Press and move the cursor to "OWN SHIP", and then press .
4. The ship's position is shown in "5. WPT LAT", "6. WPT LON".
5. Press "ENTRY".

4.4.2.2 Registering Latitude and Longitude

Any desired latitude and longitude can be registered in the waypoint list.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" and display the waypoint registration screen.
2. Press "POSITION".

3. Press and move the cursor to "LAT/LON", and press .

4. Press "WPT LAT", enter the latitude with the numeric keypad, and press .

N/S can be selected via .

5. Press "WPT LON", enter the longitude with the numeric keypad, and press .

E/W can be selected via .

When "WPT LAT" is entered, the cursor moves automatically to the latitude numerical entry
position. If "WPT LON" entry is unnecessary, press .

6. Press "ENTRY".

4-31
4.4.2.3 Registering the Cursor Position

Any cursor position on the plot screen can be registered to the waypoint list.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" and display the waypoint registration screen.
2. Press "POSITION".

3. Press , move the cursor to "CURSOR", and press .

4. The plot screen will be displayed.
Press to move the cursor, and press at the position you wish to
register.
When the cursor is moved, the cursor position is displayed at the top right of the screen.
5. The cursor position is shown in "5. WPT LAT", "6. WPT LON".
6. Press "ENTRY".

4.4.2.4 Registering a Bearing and Distance from a Specified Position

A position can be specified as a start point, and then another position defined by its bearing and
distance from said start point can be registered to the waypoint list.
Any of the following 6 can be used as a start point.
(1) Specified Longitude Latitude: Select "LAT/LON".
(2) Own Ship Position: Select "OWN SHIP".
(3) Cursor Position on Plot Screen: Select "CURSOR".
(4) Position Registered in Waypoint List: Select "WPT LIST".
(5) Position Registered in Event/Mark List: Select "EVENT LIST".
(6) When Continually Setting Waypoints, the Last Registered Position: Select "PRE WPT"

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" and display the waypoint registration screen.
2. Press "POSITION".

3. Press , move the cursor to "BRG/DIST", and press .

4. The start position setting screen will be displayed.
Press "START POINT", press to select the start point, and press .

(1) When "LAT/LON" is Selected

Press "START LAT", enter the latitude with the numeric keypad, and press .

N/S can be selected via .

Press "START LON", enter the longitude with the numeric keypad, and press .

E/W can be selected via .

When "START LAT" is entered, the cursor moves automatically to the latitude numerical
entry position. If "START LON" entry is unnecessary, press .

4-32
(2) When "OWN SHIP" is Selected

The ship's position is shown in "2. START LAT", "3. START LON".

(3) When "CURSOR" is Selected

The plot screen will be displayed.

Press to move the cursor, and press at the position you wish to
register.
When the cursor is moved, the cursor position is displayed at the top right of the screen.
The cursor position is shown in "2. START LAT", "3. START LON".

(4) When "WPT LIST" is Selected

The waypoint list will be displayed. Move the cursor to the position you wish to use as the
start point, and press .

The cursor can be moved to the number you wish to use as the start point in the following
ways:
(1) Move with the up and down keys
(2) Enter the desired number with the numeric keypad
Please refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for more details.

The waypoint list position is shown in "2. START LAT", "3. START LON".

(5) When "EVENT LIST" is Selected

The event/mark list will be displayed. Move the cursor to the position you wish to use as the
start point, and press .

The cursor can be moved to the number you wish to use as the start point in the following
ways:
(1) Move with the up and down keys
(2) Enter the desired number with the numeric keypad
Please refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for more details.
The event/mark list position is shown in "2. START LAT", "3. START LON".

(6) When "PRE WPT" is Selected

When waypoints are continuously registered, selection can be performed from the second or
later registered waypoint.
The last registered position is shown in "2. START LAT", "3. START LON".

5. Press "BEARING", enter the bearing with the numeric keypad, and press .

6. Press "DISTANCE", enter the distance with the numeric keypad, and press .
When "BEARING" is entered, the cursor moves automatically to the distance numerical entry
position. If "DISTANCE" entry is unnecessary, press .
The latitude and longitude of the position calculated from the start point, bearing, and
distance will be displayed.
7. Press "ENTRY".

4-33
4.4.2.5 Registering from the Event/Mark List

Positions registered in the event/mark list can be registered as waypoints.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" and display the waypoint registration screen.
2. Press "POSITION".

3. Press , move the cursor to "EVENT LIST", and press .

4. The event/mark list will be displayed. Move the cursor to the number you wish to register,
and press .
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
The event/mark list position is shown in "5. WPT LAT", "6. WPT LON".
5. Press "ENTRY".

4.4.3 Changing the Waypoint Symbol Shape

· The default symbol shape displayed when a waypoint is registered can be changed.
· The shapes of symbols which have been selected and specified individually for waypoints are
not changed.
· Please refer to "4.3.6.2 Editing Waypoint Symbols" and "4.4.4 Editing Waypoint Information" for
details regarding individual changes.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and select "WPT".

2. Press to select the shape, and press .

Waypoint Symbol Shape List

4-34
4.4.4 Editing Waypoint Information

· Registered waypoint information (symbol shape, comment, waypoint position) editing can be
performed.
· Waypoints on routes which are currently being executed cannot be edited.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and display the waypoint list.

2. Move the cursor to the waypoint number you wish to edit.
The cursor can be moved in the following ways:
(1) Move with the up and down keys
(2) Enter the desired number with the numeric keypad
Please refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for more details.
3. Press and display the waypoint registration screen.

Waypoint Registration Screen

(1) To Edit the Waypoint Number

4. Press "WPT No.".

5. Use the numeric keypad to enter the waypoint number.
The information will change to the entered waypoint number.

(2) To Edit the Symbol Shape

6. Press "SYMBOL".

7. Press to select the shape, and press .

(3) To Edit a Comment

8. Press "COMMENT" and enter the comment.

Please refer to "4.9 Entering Comments" for instructions on how to enter comments.

(4) To Edit the Waypoint Position

9. Press "POSITION", and enter the waypoint position.

Refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" for details regarding entering the waypoint position.
10. Press "ENTRY".

4-35
4.4.5 Copying Waypoint Information

· Waypoint information can be copied to another waypoint number. Event and mark information
can also be copied to the waypoint list. HOME is treated as number 1 on the waypoint list.
· The waypoints used by the shared active routes received from ECDIS, which are stored in
number 10001 - 10512, are automatically overwritten when the next route is received.
Waypoints which you wish to retain must be copied to a number between 1 and 10000.
· The temporary route waypoints stored in numbers 10513 to 11024 disappear when a different
temporary route is created or the power is turned off. Waypoints which you wish to retain must
be copied to a number between 1 and 10000.
· When there is no more space available, entries can be overwritten. However, waypoints used
by a route cannot be overwritten.
· Select the source to copy from, and specify the number to which the information is to be
copied.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and display the waypoint/route copy screen.

2. Press "WPT COPY".

3. The cursor will move to the "COPY ORG", so press .

4. Press to select the copy source, and then press .

The following is an overview of the copy source submenu.
(1) WPT LIST: From the waypoint list, choose 1 waypoint number, or a string of
contiguous waypoint numbers.
Any number can be selected, from 1 to 11024.
(2) EVENT LIST: From the event/mark list, choose 1 event/mark number, or a string of
contiguous event/mark numbers.
(3) WPT No: Use the numeric keypad to enter the waypoint number.
(4) FROM TO: Use the numeric keypad to enter the start and end numbers from the
waypoint list.

(1) When "WPT LIST" is Selected

The range to be copied is confirmed when is pressed after selecting the start and end
point.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for details regarding range selection.

(2) When "EVENT LIST" is Selected

The range to be copied is confirmed when is pressed after selecting the start and end
point.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for details regarding range selection.

4-36
(3) When "WPT No." is Selected

Use the numeric keypad to select the waypoint number to be copied, and press .

(4) When "FROM TO" is Selected

Multiple waypoint numbers can be copied. Use the numeric keypad to enter the start and
end point waypoint numbers, and press .

4. The cursor will move to the "COPY DEST", so press .

Copy Origin Start

Copy Origin End
Copy Quantity

5. Press to select the copy destination, and then press .

The following is an overview of the copy destination submenu.
(1) WPT LIST: Select the waypoint number from the waypoint list to copy information
to.
(2) WPT NO.: Use the numeric keypad to enter the waypoint number to copy
information to.
When multiple numbers are selected as the copy source, the information will be pasted
sequentially starting from the selected copy destination number.

(1) When "WPT LIST" is Selected

Numbers 1 - 10000 of the waypoint list will be displayed. Move the cursor and press .
Please refer to "4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number" for more details.

(2) When "WPT No." is Selected

Use the numeric keypad to select the waypoint number to be copied to, and press .

4-37
6. The cursor will move to the "COPY", so press .

Start of Copy Destination

If there is insufficient continuous free space at the copy destination, the following will be
displayed. Press to select the copy method, and press .

The following is an overview of the display.

ALL OVER WRITE :Overwrites from selected copy destination.
Waypoints which are used by routes cannot be overwritten.
In this case, "ALL OVER WRITE" is not displayed.
TO EMPTY AREA : Copying is performed to a different empty area.
When there are no empty area in list, "TO EMPTY AREA" is not
displayed.
CANCEL : Copying is cancelled.

Memo
· When multiple contiguous numbers are selected as the copy source, selections which
span registration group boundaries (10000 and 10512) cannot be made.
Ex.) 9999 - 10001 and 10511 - 10513 cannot be selected.

4-38
4.4.6 Deleting Waypoints

· Waypoints registered between 1 and 10000 can be deleted.

· Waypoints on routes which are currently being executed cannot be deleted.
· When a waypoint on a route which is not currently being performed is deleted, it will be deleted
from the route as well.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then , and the "DELETE WPT/ROUTE" Screen will be

displayed.
2. Press "WPT DEL".

The following is an overview of the delete waypoint submenu.

(1) ALL: Delete all waypoints from 1 to 10000.
(2) WPT LIST: Specify the range to be deleted on the waypoint list.
(3) WPT NO.: Specify the waypoint number to be deleted with the numeric keypad.
(4) FROMTO: Enter the start and end points of the range to be deleted with the
numeric keypad.

3. Press to select the waypoint to be deleted, and then press .

(1) When "FROM TO" is Selected

Enter the start point and end point with the numeric keypad, and press .

(2) When "WPT LIST" is Selected

The waypoint list will be displayed. Move the cursor to the start and end points, and press
to select the range.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for more details.

(3) When "WPT No." is Selected

Enter the waypoint number with the numeric keypad, and press .

4. The following will be displayed. Press to select "YES", and press .

Deletion Range Start

Deletion Range End

Deletion Quantity

4-39
4.5 Route Planning
· Routes can be made from registered waypoints.
· A maximum of 100 routes can be created with this unit, with each route having up to 512
waypoints. Route widths, arrival circle radii, GC/RL, and other waypoint information can be set
for each LEG. Please refer to "4.5.1 Displaying the Route List" for details regarding what
waypoint information can be set.
· Created routes can be shared with external equipment such as ECDIS.
· Created routes are registered in the route list.
· The route list is divided into 3 regions, managed via numbering from 1 - 102.
1 - 100: Routes created on this unit can be registered here.
101: A shared active route received from ECDIS can be registered here.
102: A temporary route can be registered here.
· Routes 1 - 101 are saved, so they remain even if the power is turned off. Route 102 is not
saved, and will disappear if the power is turned off.

4.5.1 Displaying the Route List

Created routes can be displayed in the route list. LEG information for each LEG of the route, and
waypoint information for each LEG, can also be displayed.
TTG (required time) cannot be calculated for routes containing LEGs for which no planned speed
has been set.

Route Number at Cursor

Position
Number of Route
Entry/Number of
Routes
Up/Down Scroll

Total Number of
Waypoints Total Route Distance
Route Number TTG (Required Time)
Comment

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the route list.

2. Move the cursor to the route number whose LEG information you wish to display, and press

Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
The LEG information screen will be displayed.

On the LEG information screen, the route waypoints are listed in order.

4-40
 Distance from ship position to Required time from ship position to
cursor specified waypoint cursor specified waypoint

Up / Down Scroll

Cursor No display : Use

Position SKIP: Skip Waypoint

LEG distance
calculation methods:
LEG Information Screen R: Rhumb line
G: Great circle
Bearing from previous LEG distance
waypoint

3. Move the cursor to the waypoint whose waypoint information you wish to display, and press
.
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.

WPT Info WPT Info (Details)

The following items can be set.

(1) WIDTH PORT: The port route width can be set.
(2) WIDTH STBD: The starboard route width can be set.
(3) ARRIVAL RAD: The arrival circle radius can be set.
(4) SPEED: The planned speed of the LEG can be set.
(5) SAIL GC/RL: The LEG distance calculation method can be set.
GC: Distance is calculated using the great circle method.
Even if GC is set, RL is shown on plot screen.
RL: Distance is calculated using the rhumb line method.
(6) STATUS: You can set whether the waypoint will be used or not.
(For newly created routes and routes with one waypoint, waypoints can not be set
as unused or deleted)
USED: The waypoint is used.
SKIP: The waypoint remains on the route, but is skipped.
All waypoints cannot be skipped.
DELETE: Delete from the route. The waypoint will remain on the waypoint list.
The waypoint on the active route cannot be deleted.
(7) DETAILS: ROT, turn radius, and time zone settings can be performed.
(7-1) TURN RATE: The rate of turn when passing a waypoint can be set.
(7-2) TURN RADIUS: The turn radius when passing a waypoint can be set.
(7-3) TIME ZONE: The time difference with the waypoint can be set.

4-41
 Memo
· Great-Circle Sailing: The shortest distance from the current position to the waypoint
can be used, but the bearing will be different from that determined on a nautical chart,
and will change during movement.
· Rhumb line Sailing: Sailing can be performed directly from the current position to the
waypoint, without changing bearing.
The ship bearing will match that obtained by drawing a straight line on a nautical chart
between the current position and the waypoint.
· Great-Circle sailing is generally used for long distance sailing, as it results in a shorter
route than that obtained in Rhumb line sailing.

4.5.2 Creating Routes

· To create a route, decide the route number and select, in order, the waypoints to be used as
way points.
· The same waypoint cannot be selected in a continuous manner.
· Up to 100 routes can be created.
· Up to 512 waypoints can be set on 1 route.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the route list.

2. Move the cursor to the number you wish to register, and press to switch to the
waypoint entry screen.
Please refer to "4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number" for more details.

Enter First
Waypoint

Move cursor to number you wish to register Waypoint Entry Screen

3. Press to display the waypoint list.

4. Move the cursor to the waypoint number you wish to register, and press .
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
5. The waypoint information screen will be displayed. Select the item you wish to enter with the
numeric keypad, and enter the waypoint information.
Please refer to "4.5.1 Displaying the Route List" for details.
Select "7. DETAIL" to set the TURN RATE, turn radius, or time zone. This is only used for
routes shared with ECDIS.
6. Press "ENTRY".
7. The screen will return to the route information screen where the waypoint is registered. To
continue setting waypoints, repeat steps 4 to 6 above.

4-42
8. Enter a comment.
Use the up and down keys to move the cursor to the comment entry field, and press .

The unit will enter comment entry mode. Enter the comment.
Please refer to "4.9 Entering Comments" for instructions on how to enter comments.

Comment Entry Field

Move the cursor to the comment entry field Comment Entry Mode

9. When you have completed route creation, press , or to exit the route
information screen.

4.5.3 Editing Routes

· Route waypoint information can be changed, and waypoints can be skipped, added, or deleted.

4.5.3.1 Changing Waypoint Information

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.5.1 Displaying the Route List", and select the waypoint information you wish to
change.
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the item number you wish to change, and change the
waypoint information.
Please refer to "4.5.1 Displaying the Route List" for details.
Select "7. DETAILS" to set the TURN RATE, turn radius, and time zone. This is only used for
routes shared with ECDIS.
If "SKIP" is selected for "6. STATE", the waypoint will be skipped. Please refer to "4.3.7.3
Skipping Route Waypoints" for details regarding skip operation.
If "DELETE" is selected for "6. STATE", the waypoint will be deleted from the route.
3. To change a comment, move the cursor to the comment field on the LEG information screen
and perform changes.
4. When you have completed route editing, press , , or to exit the route
information screen.

4-43
4.5.3.2 Adding Route Waypoints

Waypoints can be added at any position along routes.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.5.1 Displaying the Route List", select the route to which you wish to add a
waypoint, and display the LEG information.

LEG Information Screen

2. Move the cursor to the position where you wish to perform addition.
Ex 1) To add a waypoint between 3 and 4, move the cursor to waypoint 4.
Ex 2) To add a waypoint before 1, move the cursor to waypoint 1.
Ex 3) To add a waypoint after the final waypoint, move the cursor past the final waypoint.

Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
To make an addition, press after the final waypoint.

To make an addition between waypoints, or before the first waypoint, press and hold

and .

The waypoint list will be displayed.

Ex 1) Adding a waypoint between 3 and 4

Move cursor to fourth waypoint

Waypoint List

4-44
Ex 2) Adding a waypoint at the start
Move cursor to first waypoint

Waypoint List
Ex 3) Adding a waypoint at the end
Move cursor to after last waypoint

Waypoint List

4. Move the cursor to the waypoint number you wish to register, and press .
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
5. The waypoint information screen will be displayed. Select the item number you wish to enter
with the numeric keypad, and enter the waypoint information.
Please refer to "4.5.1 Displaying the Route List" for details.
Select "7. DETAIL" to set the "TURN RATE","TURN RADIUS, or "TIME ZONE". This is only
used for routes shared with ECDIS.
6. Press "ENTRY".

7. When you have completed waypoint addition, press , , or to exit the

route information screen.

4-45
4.5.4 Copying Routes

· Routes which have been created can be copied to different route numbers.
· The waypoints used by the shared active routes received from ECDIS in number 101 are
automatically overwritten when the next route is received. Routes which you wish to retain
must be copied to a number between 1 and 100.
· The temporary route waypoints stored in number 102 disappear when a different temporary
route is created or the power is turned off. Routes which you wish to retain must be copied to a
number between 1 and 100.
· Multiple waypoints can be copied, as long as their numbers are contiguous.
· When there is no more space available, entries can be overwritten. Overwriting cannot be
performed for active routes.
· Select the source to copy from, and specify the number to which the information is to be
copied.
· In the case a temporary route and sharing route are copied, the waypoint need also be copied.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the waypoint/route copy screen.

2. Press "ROUTE COPY".

3. The cursor will move to the "COPY ORG", so press .

4. Press to select the copy source, and then press .

The following is an overview of the copy source submenu.

(1) ROUTE LIST: From the route list, choose 1 route number, or a string of contiguous
route numbers.
Any number can be selected, from 1 to 102.
(2) ROUTE NO.: Enter the route number with the numeric keypad.
(3) FROM TO: Enter the start and end numbers from the route list with the numeric
keypad.

(1) When "ROUTE LIST" is Selected

The range to be copied is confirmed when is pressed after selecting the start and end
point.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for details regarding range selection.

(2) When "ROUTE No." is Selected

Enter the route number you wish to copy with the numeric keypad, and press .

4-46
(4) When "FROM TO" is Selected

Multiple route numbers can be copied.

Enter the start point and end point with the numeric keypad, and press .

4. The cursor will move to the "COPY DEST", so press .

Copy Origin Start

Copy Origin End
Copy Quantity

5. Press to select the copy destination, and then press .

The following is an overview of the copy destination submenu.

(1) ROUTE LIST: Select the destination route number to copy to from the route list.
(2) ROUTE NO.: Use the numeric keypad to enter the route number to copy information
to.
When multiple numbers are selected as the copy source, the information will be pasted
sequentially starting from the selected copy destination number.

(1) When "ROUTE LIST" is Selected

The route list, from 1 to 100, will be displayed, so move the cursor and press .
Please refer to "4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number" for more details.

(2) When "ROUTE No." is Selected

Use the numeric keypad to select the route number to be copied to, and press .

6. In the case a temporary route and sharing route are copied, select the copy destination of
waypoint. Please refer to "4.4.5 Copying Waypoint Information" procedure 5 for selection of
copy destination.

7. The cursor will move to the "COPY", so press .

Start of Copy Destination

If there is insufficient continuous free space at the copy destination location, the following will
be displayed. Press to select the copy method, and press .

4-47
 The following is an overview of the display.
ALL OVERWRITE: Overwrites from selected copy destination.
Overwriting cannot be performed for active routes.
In this case, "ALL OVER WRITE" is not displayed.
TO EMPTY AREA: Copying is performed to a different empty area:
When there are no empty area in list, "TO EMPTY AREA" is not
displayed.
CANCEL: Copying is cancelled.

Memo
· The boundary of 100 cannot be crossed when selecting multiple numbers as the copy
source.
Ex) A selection such as "99 - 101" is invalid.

4.5.5 Deleting Routes

· Routes registered between 1 and 100 can be deleted.

· The waypoint on the route to be deleted can be deleted at the same time.
· In the case the waypoint is also deleted, the waypoint used on the different route is not deleted.
· Active routes cannot be deleted.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the waypoint/route deletion screen.

2. Press "ROUTE DEL".

The following is an overview of the route deletion submenu.

(1) ALL: Delete all routes between 1 and 100.
(2) FROM TO: Enter the start and end points of the range to be deleted with the numeric
keypad.
(3) ROUTE LIST: Specify the range to be deleted on the waypoint list.
(4) ROUTE No.: Specify the route number to be deleted with the numeric keypad.

3. Press to select the route to be deleted, and then press .

(1) When "FROM TO" is Selected

Enter the start point and end point with the numeric keypad, and press .

(2) When "ROUTE LIST" is Selected

The route list will be displayed. Move the cursor to select the start and end points, and press
to select the range.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for more details.
4-48
(3) When "ROUTE No." is Selected

Enter the route number with the numeric keypad, and press .

4. Press to select whether the waypoint is deleted, and the press .

The following is an overview of the waypoint deletion submenu.
(1) ROUTE: Only the route is deleted.
(2) ROUTE + WPT: The route as well as the waypoint used on the route are deleted.
The waypoint used on the different route is not deleted.
(3) CANCEL: Deleting is cancelled.

5. The following will be displayed. Press to select "YES", and press .

Delete Range Start Point

Delete Range End Point

Items to be Deleted

4.5.6 Sharing Routes with ECDIS

This unit can be used to send routes to ECDIS or radars, and also to receive routes created by
ECDIS (data route sharing). Routes which are underway (active routes) can be shared.
If a route is switched on this unit or on ECDIS when sharing the active route, the connecting
equipment's route will also switch.
In order to share routes, the equipment must support sharing (ECDIS, radar), and be connected
in a LAN.

4.5.6.1 Sharing Data Routes

This unit can be used to send routes to ECDIS, and also to receive routes created by ECDIS. If
data route sharing is configured, data route reception will occur automatically.
First, configure data route sharing.
If data routes are not shared, configure sharing as directed in "4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings ".

To send a data route, follow the procedures below to select and send the desired route.

Procedure

1. Press , , and , and select "TRANSFER WPT / ROUTE (LAN)".

2. Press "OUT / IN".

3. Press to select "OUT", and then press .

4. Press "CONNECT".

5. Select the connection destination with , and press .

Normally, "MULTICAST" should be selected for the destination.
To send to a specific unit, select "UNICAST".

4-49
6. When "UNICAST" is selected, press and to select the Destination IP "TO IP"
and "PORT No.".

7. Press "FORMAT".

8. Press to select "SHARE ROUTE", and press .

9. Press "OUT TYPE".

10. Press to select the output data, and press .

The following is an overview of the output data submenu.
(1) ALL: Output all routes between 1 and 101.
(2) ROUTE LIST: Select a range on the route list to be output.
(3) ROUTE No.: Specify the route number to be sent with the numeric keypad.
(4) FROM TO: Enter the start and end points of the range to be sent with the numeric
keypad.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for details regarding range selection.

11. Press "START".

12. The following will be displayed. Select "YES", and press .

4-50
4.5.6.2 Sharing Active Routes

If a route is switched on this unit or on ECDIS when sharing the active route, the connecting
equipment's route will also switch.
Sharing must be enabled to share active routes.
The following is an overview of the active route sharing configuration submenu.
(1) SHARE1: If the active route is switched on the unit, the route will automatically be sent
out to connected equipment.
When a shared route is received, the route is automatically switched.
(2) SHARE2: If the active route is switched on the unit, a request is made to the user of the
unit before the route is sent. Transmission of the route to the connected
equipment is dependant on the permission of the user.
If the user has not authorized sending, the active route will only be executed on
the local unit.
When a shared route is received, the route is automatically switched.
(3) SHARE3: If the active route is switched on the unit, the route will automatically be sent
out to connected equipment.
When a shared route is received, the user is asked whether or not they want to
switch routes.
If the user does not authorize route switching, the route will not be switched.
(4) SHARE4: If the active route is switched on the unit, a request is made to the user of the
unit before the route is sent. Transmission of the route to the connected
equipment is dependant on the permission of the user.
If the user has not authorized sending, the active route will only be executed on
the local unit.
When a shared route is received, the user is asked whether or not they want to
switch routes.
If the user does not authorize route switching, the route will not be switched.
(5) SHARE5: The active route cannot be sent.
When a shared route is received, the route is automatically switched.
If the active route is configured for sharing, an icon will be displayed on the status bar at the
bottom of the screen.
If the icon is not displayed, refer to "4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" and configure sharing.

SHARE1 Icon: SHARE2 Icon: SHARE3 Icon: SHARE4 Icon:

SHARE5 Icon:

Procedure

(1) SHARE 1 Active Route Sharing

Route Start / Output

1. Start the route as directed in "4.6 Performing Navigation".
LAN route output starts automatically.

Route Reception
Route switching occurs automatically.

(2) SHARE 2 Active Route Sharing

Route Start / Output

1. Start the route as directed in "4.6 Performing Navigation".
2. When the route is started, the following will be displayed.
Select "YES" to output the active route externally.
Select "NO" to not output the active route externally. If no external output is performed,
the active route is performed only on the local unit.

4-51
 Route Reception
Route switching occurs automatically.

(3) SHARE 3 Active Route Sharing

Route Start / Output

1. Start the route as directed in "4.6 Performing Navigation".
LAN route output starts automatically.

Route Reception
When an active route is received, the following is displayed.
Select "YES" to switch the active route.
Select "NO" to not switch the active route. If the active route is not switched, the unit will
not switch routes and will stop sharing route navigation.

(4) SHARE 4 Active Route Sharing

Route Start / Output

1. Start the route as directed in "4.6 Performing Navigation".
2. When the route is started, the following will be displayed.
Select "YES" to output the active route externally.
Select "NO" to not output the active route externally. If no external output is performed,
the active route is performed only on the local unit.

Route Reception
When an active route is received, the following is displayed.
Select "YES" to switch the active route.
Select "NO" to not switch the active route. If the active route is not switched, the unit will
not switch routes and will stop sharing route navigation.

(5) SHARE 5 Active Route Sharing

Route Start / Output

The active route cannot be output.

Route Reception
Route switching occurs automatically.

4-52
4.5.7 Setting Route Default Settings

· The route default value is applied to routes created via GOTO.

· The following is an overview of the route default settings submenu.
(1) WIDTH PORT: The port route width can be set.
(2) WIDTH STBD: The starboard route width can be set.
(3) ARRIVAL RAD: The arrival circle radius can be set.
(4) SPEED: The planned speed can be set.
(5) SAIL GC/RL: GC or RL can be selected as the sail calculation method.
(6) SOG SMOOTHING: Smoothing can be applied to ship speed when calculating expected
arrival time and expected time required.
Up to 99 seconds of smoothing can be set. When the estimated arrival
time has a large degree of variance, use a large smoothing value.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the route default setting screen.

2. Select the number of the item you wish to set.
3. Select "SET" with and press .

If you do not wish to set an item, select "OFF" and press .

4. Enter values with the numeric keypad, and press .

4-53
4.6 Performing Navigation
· Registered and temporary routes can be started.
· Navigation can be performed via the following methods.
(1) Selecting a route from the route list
(2) Selecting a waypoint with the GOTO key
(3) Selecting a route with the GOTO key
(4) Creating a route with the GOTO key
· Navigation cannot be performed above 89 degrees north or south.
· Temporary routes created with GOTO use the route widths, arrival circle radiuses, and planned
speeds set as route default setting values.
Please refer to "4.5.7 Setting Route Default Settings" for details regarding setting route default
setting values.
· Waypoint switching occurs when the arrival circle is reached.

4.6.1 Selecting a Route from the Route List

Routes can be selected from the route list and started.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the route start/end screen.

2. The route list will be displayed. Move the cursor to the route number you wish to start, and
press .
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
3. The route start/end screen will be displayed, so perform route settings.

The following is an overview of each submenu.

(1) LEG CHANGE: You can set whether LEG change is performed automatically or
manually when own ship arrives within the waypoint arrival circle.
AUTO: The waypoint automatically changes to the next waypoint. is
displayed in the status bar.
When the arrival circle is reached, the alarm of the unit will be
sounded, and the waypoint will be updated, displaying the following.
The display will disappear automatically in 5 seconds.
When the final waypoint is reached, the arrival alarm sound
configured in the alarm settings will be sounded.

4-54
 MANUAL: Switching to the next waypoint is performed manually. is
displayed in the status bar.
When the arrival circle is reached, the arrival alarm sound configured
in the alarm settings will be sounded, and the following will be
displayed. Press to stop the alarm and update the waypoint.

(2) DIRECTION: You can set whether to navigate in the order of the waypoints, or to
navigate starting from the final waypoint.
ORDER: Navigation is performed in the order of the waypoints.
REVERSE: Navigation is performed starting with the final waypoint.

(3) NAVIGATION: Starts and stops navigation.

START: Navigation is started.
END: Navigation is stopped.

(1) Setting the LEG CHANGE Method

Press "LEG CHANGE", press to select the LEG change method, and then

press .

(2) Setting the DIRECTION

Press "DIRECTION", press to select the direction, and then press .

4. Press "NAVIGATION" to start navigation.

4-55
4.6.2 Starting Navigation with the GOTO Key

· If a waypoint or route is selected with the GOTO key, navigation starts to that waypoint.
· If a waypoint on the active route is selected with the GOTO key, navigation restarts from that
waypoint.
· Routes created with GOTO are stored as a temporary route with route number 102.
· The GOTO key can be used from any screen other than the menu screen, waypoint
information screen, or Navigation Assistance 4 screen.
· The following methods can be used to select the waypoint.
(1) Set HOME PORT as the waypoint.
(2) Enter the waypoint number.
(3) Enter the route number.
(4) Enter the event / mark number.
(5) Set the cursor position as the waypoint (Up to 512 waypoints can be set, allowing temporary
route creation)
(6) Select from each list (waypoint list, route list, event / mark list).
(7) Enter the waypoint number on the active route to restart the navigation.

Set HOME as waypoint

Enter waypoint number

Enter route number

Enter event / mark number

Display plot screen

Display waypoint list

Display event / mark list

Display route list

Procedure

(1) Set HOME PORT as the waypoint

HOME sets the HOME PORT registered at the start of they waypoint list as the waypoint. If a
waypoint is set as HOME, it can be easily set as a waypoint.
If no HOME PORT is registered, "1. HOME" will not be displayed.

1. Press and then .

Navigation will start with the HOME PORT as the destination waypoint.

(2) Enter the waypoint number

If you know the waypoint number, you can enter the number to set the waypoint.

1. Press and then .

2. Enter the waypoint number, and press to start navigation.

4-56
(3) Select a route number
If you know the route number, you can enter the number to set the route.

1. Press and then .

2. Enter the route number, and press .

3. The route start / end screen will be displayed, so perform route settings.
Please refer to "4.6.1 Selecting a Route from the Route List" for details regarding each
submenu and configuration methods.
4. Press "NAVIGATION" to start navigation.

(4) Select from the event / mark number

If you know the event / mark number, you can enter the number to set the waypoint.

1. Press and then .

2. Enter the event / mark number, and press to start navigation.

(5) Set the cursor position as the waypoint

Any cursor position on the plot screen can be set as waypoints. Multiple waypoints can be
selected and a temporary route created. Temporary routes can also be added to the route
list as a permanent route.

1. Press , and then , and display the plot screen.

2. Move the cursor to the waypoint position, and press .

For multiple waypoints, move the cursor again, and press .

Pressing deletes the previous waypoint.

Move cursor

At point you wish to make waypoint, At point you wish to make waypoint,
press twice.
press

3. Press again at the final waypoint to start navigation.

4. The following will be displayed.

4-57
5. If you don't wish to register the route in the route list, select "No" and press .
Navigation will start without route registration.
If you wish to register the route in the route list, select "Yes" and press . The route list
will be displayed.
Move the cursor to the number you wish to register, and press . The route will be
registered in the route list, and navigation will start.
Please refer to "4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number" for more details.
The waypoints selected with the cursor will also be registered in the waypoint list. Registered
waypoint numbers will be displayed as waypoint symbols on the plot screen.

(6) Select from the waypoint list

A waypoint can be selected from the waypoint list.

1. Press , , and then , and display the waypoint list.

2. Move the cursor to the waypoint number you wish to set as the waypoint, and press to
start navigation.
For details regarding moving the cursor, please refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor Within a
List".

(7) Select from the event / mark list

A waypoint can be selected from the event / mark list.

1. Press , , and then , and display the event / mark list.

2. Move the cursor to the number you wish to set as the waypoint, and press to start
navigation.
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.

(8) Select a route from the route list

The GOTO key can be used to select and execute a route.

1. Press , , and then , and display the route list.

2. Move the cursor to the number you wish to execute, and press .
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.
3. The route start / end screen will be displayed, so perform route settings.
Please refer to "4.6.1 Selecting a Route from the Route List" for details regarding each
submenu and configuration methods.

4. Press "NAVIGATION" to start navigation.

(9) Enter the waypoint number on the active route.

If a waypoint number on the active route is entered, navigation will restart from the
configured waypoint after discarding the route currently executed.

1. Press and then .

2. Enter the waypoint number, and press to start navigation.

4-58
Ex) To restart the route from waypoint number 0004.

Enter waypoint 0004 on the route

with the GOTO key.

Restart the route from

waypoint 0004.

Active route

4-59
4.6.3 Stopping Navigation

· Navigation currently underway can be stopped.

· To end the navigation, there are two methods: selecting in the menu and holding down

4.6.3.1 Ending Navigation with GOTO key

· Operation can be performed on any screen other than the menu, waypoint information,
navigation assistance 4 screen.

Procedure

1. Press and hold down (over 3 seconds).

2. The following will be displayed, and then select "YES".

4.6.3.2 Ending Navigation in Menu

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the route start/end screen.

2. Press "NAVIGATION" to stop navigation.

3. The following will be displayed. Select "YES".

4-60
4.7 Events/Marks
· Events, marks, MOB, and lines are all registered in the event/mark list.

4.7.1 Displaying Events/Marks

· A list of all registered events and marks can be displayed.

· MOB is registered as event number 000.
Event/Mark number Number of
selected by cursor Entries
Up/Down
Scroll

ML: LINE
Entry Position E: Event
M: Mark
Event/Mark Number
Symbol

Comment Entry
Date/Time

Event/Mark List
Procedure

1. Press , , and in order to display the event / mark list.

4.7.2 Event and Mark Information Display

· Registered event and mark information can be displayed.

Procedure

1. Press , , and in order to display the event / mark list.

2. Move the cursor to the number of the event or mark you wish to display, and press to
display the event or mark information.
Refer to "4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List" for details regarding cursor movement.

Event/Mark Information

If there are no externally connected devices, and for mark information, water temperature,
water depth, and current information is not displayed.

4-61
4.7.3 Editing Event and Mark Information

· Registered event (including MOB) and mark information (symbol, comment) can be edited.

Procedure

1. Display the event or mark information to be displayed using the procedure given in "4.7.2
Event and Mark Information Display".

(1) To Change the Symbol Shape

2. Press "SYMBOL".

3. Press to select the shape, and press .

(2) To Change Comment

4. Press "COMMENT" and enter the comment.

Please refer to "4.9 Entering Comments" for instructions on how to enter comments.
5. Press "ENTRY".

4.7.4 Deleting Event/Mark Information

· Registered events and marks can be deleted.

Deletion can be performed using one of the methods below.
(1) Specify a range on the event/mark list for deletion
(2) Delete all events
(3) Delete all marks
(4) Delete all events and marks

Procedure

1. Press , , and in order to display the delete screen.

To specify a range on the event/mark list for deletion
2. Press "DELETE EVENT/MARK LIST" to display the event/mark list.
3. Select the range you wish to delete.
The range to be copied is confirmed when is pressed after selecting the start and end
point.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for details regarding range selection.

To delete all
2. To delete all events, press "DELETE ALL EVENT".

To delete all marks, press "DELETE ALL MARK".

To delete all events and marks, press "DELETE ALL EVENT/MARK".

4-62
4.8 List Screen Operation
· This unit displays waypoints, events, marks, and routes in list form.
· All lists use the same operating procedures.

4.8.1 Moving the Cursor within a List

· The cursor can be moved within a list in the following ways:

(1) The cursor can be moved via the directional keys
(2) The cursor can be moved by entering a number with the numeric keypad
These function for cursor operation in all lists.

4.8.1.1 Moving the Cursor with the Directional Keys

The operation examples show cursor movement within the waypoint list, but the instructions
provided apply to operation within all lists.
The up and down keys can be used to move the cursor up and down, while the left and right keys
can be used to advance to the next page.

Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Press to move the cursor up or down, and to move to the next page.

Move up / down

Waypoint List

Move to next page

4-63
4.8.1.2 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter a Number and Move the Cursor

The operation examples show selection of waypoint 5 in the waypoint list, but the instructions
provided apply to operation within all lists.
Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Enter the destination number "5" with the numeric keypad, and press .
The cursor moves to number 5.
The number entered with the
numeric keypad is displayed

Enter move destination, "5", with Cursor moves to number entered, "5"
numeric keypad

Memo
· In the list that displays only the registered number, when the input number with
numeric keypad doesn't exist, the cursor moves to a number that is the nearest the
input number.

4.8.2 Moving the Cursor to an Unregistered Number

· The cursor can be moved within a list in the following ways:

(1) The cursor can be moved via the up and down keys
(2) You can jump to an unregistered number.
(3) The cursor can be moved by entering a number with the numeric keypad
· This is used when registering waypoints, selecting copy destinations for waypoints, creating
routes, and selecting copy destinations for routes.

4.8.2.1 Moving the Cursor with the Directional Keys

Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Press to move the cursor.

Keys

Waypoint List The cursor moves

Press to move the cursor to the next page.

4-64
4.8.2.2 Jumping to an Unused Number

The cursor can jump to the nearest unused number (unregistered number) in a list. This can be
used when you want to register an item, but do not know of an unused number.

Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Each time is pressed while pressing , the cursor will jump to the start of the
unused field.

Waypoint List Move to waypoint number 7

3. Each time is pressed while pressing , the cursor will jump to the end of the
unused field.

Waypoint List Move to waypoint number 10000

4-65
4.8.2.3 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter a Number and Move the Cursor

The operation examples show selection of waypoint 7 in the waypoint list, but the instructions
provided apply to operation within all lists.

Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Enter the destination number "7" with the numeric keypad, and press .
The cursor moves to number 7.
The number entered with the
numeric keypad is displayed

Key

Enter move destination number Cursor moves to number entered,

"7" with numeric keypad "7"

4-66
4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List

· The following methods can be used to select a range in a list:

(1) The cursor can be moved via the up and down keys to select the start and end points
(2) The cursor can be moved by entering a number with the numeric keypad to select the
start and end points
· The two methods can be combined, such as selecting the start point with the up and down
keys, and the end point with the numeric keypad.
· This function is used when selecting a range of waypoint copy sources, route copy sources,
waypoints to be deleted, routes to be deleted, and events/marks to be deleted.

4.8.3.1 Moving the Cursor with the Directional Keys and Selecting a Range

The operation examples show selection of waypoints 2 to 5 in the waypoint list, but the
instructions provided apply to operation within all lists.

Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Press to move the cursor to "2", and press to set the start point.

3. Press to move the cursor to "5", selecting the range from 2 to 5.

Press to move the cursor to the next page.

4. Press to set the range.

Number of cursor position

Start point number

End point number

Total number
selected
Waypoint List

Move to destination number "2"

Start point "2" is set

Selection range

Move to waypoint number "5"

and press to select
range.

4-67
4.8.3.2 Moving the Cursor with the Numeric Keypad and Selecting a Range

The operation examples show selection of waypoints 2 to 5 in the waypoint list, but the
instructions provided apply to operation within all lists.
Procedure

1. Display the list.

2. Use the numeric keypad to enter number "2" and press to move the cursor to "2".

3. Press to establish the start point.

4. Use the numeric keypad to enter number "5" and press to move the cursor to "5" and
select the range.
5. Press to establish the range.
"2" displayed

Start point number

Waypoint List

Input "2".

Move to destination number "2".

Start point "2" is established.

"5" displayed

End point number

Total number selected

Selection range

Input "5".

Move to waypoint number "5"

and press to select
range.
Memo
· In the list that displays only the registered number, when the input number with
numeric keypad doesn't exist, the cursor moves to a number that is the nearest the
input number.

4-68
4.9 Entering Comments
· Comments of up to 16 characters can be added to waypoints, events, marks, and routes.
· Characters are assigned to the numeric keypad, and can be entered by pressing the keypad
keys.
· If the display language is set to Japanese, katakana entry can be performed.
· The characters assigned to the numeric keypad can be displayed onscreen.

4.9.1 Text Entry

· The entry example will show how to input "Tokyo" on the waypoint entry screen.
· Katakana is only available when the display language is set to Japanese.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.4.2 Registering Waypoints" and display the waypoint registration screen.
2. Press "COMMENT" to enter comment entry mode.

Cursor

Comment
Current mode display
Entry Field
123: Numbers
ABC: Alphabet
@\&: Symbols

3. Press to set "MODE" to "ABC".

Press to change modes as follows: Numbers → Alphabet → Symbols.

4. The "T" in "Tokyo" is assigned to numeric keypad number 8, so press .

The characters assigned to the numeric keypad are printed on the key tops.
5. Press until a "T" is displayed at the cursor position in the comment field.
All characters assigned to numeric keypad key 8 are displayed onscreen.
Press to select the next letter.

"T" displayed

Current Mode

All characters
assigned to "8" on
the numeric keypad
are displayed

Each time is
pressed, the next
character is
displayed

4-69
6. The "o" in "Tokyo" is assigned to numeric keypad number 6, so press .

Press until an "o" is displayed at the cursor position in the comment field.

7. The "k" in "Tokyo" is assigned to numeric keypad number 5, so press .

Press until a "k" is displayed at the cursor position in the comment field.

8. The "y" in "Tokyo" is assigned to numeric keypad number 9, so press .

Press until an "o" is displayed at the cursor position in the comment field.

9. The "o" in "Tokyo" is assigned to numeric keypad number 6, so press .

Press until an "o" is displayed at the cursor position in the comment field.

10. Press .

List of Characters Assigned to Numeric Keypad for Each Mode

MODE 123 ABC @\&
Numeric Number Alphabet Symbol
Keypad
1 1 1＋－＊／（）％ 1＋－＊／（）％ space
2 2 2ABCabc 2 →←
3 3 3DEFdef 3ⅠⅡⅢⅣⅤⅥ❶❷❸
4 4 4GHIghi 4；＜＝＞｛｝±「」、 。[]・
5 5 5JKLjkl 5＃＠＼＆？， ．' " _ : !
6 6 6MNOmno 6
7 7 7PQRSpqrs 7
8 8 8TUVtuv 8
9 9 9WXYZwxyz 9
0 0 0＃＠\＆？， ．' " _ 0
：！

4-70
4.9.2 Deleting Text

· Letters and characters in comments can be deleted.

Procedure

1. Use to move the cursor to the letter or character which you wish to delete.

2. Press .

Move the cursor to the "r" position The "r" is deleted

4.9.3 Adding Text

· Letters and characters can be added to comments.

Procedure

1. Move the cursor to the position where you wish to insert a letter or character.
2. Refer to "4.9.1 Text Entry", and enter the desired letter(s) or character(s).
Move cursor to position where you
To add "y" "y" is displayed
wish to make an addition

Press
Select "y"

Set MODE to "ABC"

4-71
4.9.4 Displaying Characters Assigned to the Numeric Keypad

· Characters assigned to numeric keypad keys can be displayed on screen.

· The characters are displayed onscreen in the same positions as they are on the numeric
keypad, allowing you to match their positions.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "INPUT ASSIST".

2. Press to select "ON", and then press .

When input assistance is turned "ON", the following is displayed onscreen during comment
entry in accordance with the MODE.
To hide this display, turn input assistance "OFF".

Number entry
state

Alphabet entry
state

Symbol entry state

Katakana entry state

(only when characters
displayed on the
screen are Japanese
language)

4-72
4.10 MOB
· The MOB (Man Overboard) function is used to save the position at which a person or object
has fallen overboard. This allows rapid return to that location.
· The MOB function is valid on all screens.
· When MOB is performed, the plot screen is automatically displayed, a MOB mark is displayed
at the point where the man overboard occurred, and the distance and direction from the current
position to the man overboard position is displayed.

5 sec later

Distance
Bearing

Drop point Countdown MOB Active

position

Procedure

1. Press .
A 5 second countdown will start at the bottom right of the screen. If is pressed again
within 5 seconds, the MOB function will be cancelled.

To stop the MOB function, press and hold for 3 or more seconds.

Memo
· The following are not available during MOB.
Waypoint registration, route creation, navigation start, navigation stop, waypoint copy,
route copy, waypoint deletion, route deletion, event/mark deletion, data route sharing,
active route sharing
· The route number displayed during MOB operation is 103.
· MOB is registered as number 0 in the event/mark list.

4-73
4.11 Alarm Settings
9 types of alarms can be configured. The can be individually turned off or on, and the alarm
sounds can be set individually.
The following alarms can be configured.
(1) SYSTEM: An alarm sounds when positioning is stopped. This cannot be set to Off.
(2) ARRIVAL/ANCHOR: An alarm sounds when own ship reaches or leaves the arrival
circle.
Alarms cannot be set for both arrival and departure.
(3) XTD/BOUNDARY: An alarm sounds when own ship leaves or enters the route.
Alarms cannot be set for both leaving and entering.
(4) DGPS: An alarm sounds when switching from GPS positioning to DGPS positioning, or
from DGPS positioning to GPS positioning.
(5) HDOP: An alarm sounds when the GPS positioning HDOP value exceeds the set value.
(6) TEMP: An alarm sounds when the water temperature matches the set parameters.
(7) DPTH: An alarm sounds when the water depth matches the set parameters.
(8) TRIP: An alarm sounds when the trip exceeds the set value.
(9) SPEED: An alarm sounds when the speed matches the set parameters.
Externally connected equipment is needed for water temperature or depth alarms to function.

When an alarm occurs, the alarm will sound, and a blinking icon will be displayed on the status
bar.
The alarm sound can be pressed by , but the icon will continue appearing until the alarm
has been resolved.
If you do not want an alarm to sound, set it to "OFF".

4.11.1 Setting Alarms

Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , and then to display the alarm screen.

♪: Alarm sound set

2. Select the alarm you wish to set.

4-74
(1) ARRIVAL/ANCHOR

3. Press "ARRIVAL/ANCHOR".

4. Press to select "ARV", "ANC", or "OFF", and press .

An alarm will sound when own ship enters or exits the arrival circle set for the course. If no
arrival circle is set, then an alarm will sound when own ship enters or exits the default course
value arrival circle radius.
Alarms cannot be set for both "ARRIVAL" and "ANCHOR".

Waypoint Arrival Circle Waypoint Arrival Circle

Arrival Anchor

Waypoint Arrival Alarm Anchor Alarm

(2) XTD/BOUNDARY

5. Press "XTD/BOUNDARY".

6. Press to select "XTD", "BOUNDARY", or "OFF", and press .

If the ship leaves or enters the set route, the alarm will sound. If no route is set, then an
alarm will sound when the ship enters or exits the default route width.
Alarms cannot be set for both "XTD" and "BOUNDARY".

XTD Boundary

Route Width XTD Alarm Route Width Boundary Alarm

4-75
(3) DGPS

7. Press "DGPS".

8. Press to select "OFF" or the alarm trigger state, and press .

ON → OFF: An alarm will sound when DGPS positioning switches to GPS positioning.
OFF → ON: An alarm will sound when GPS positioning switches to DGPS positioning.
ON ↔ OFF An alarm will sound when DGPS positioning switches to GPS positioning, or
when GPS positioning switches to DGPS positioning.

(4) HDOP

9. Press "HDOP".

10. Press to select "OFF" or "SET", and press .

11. Enter the HDOP value with the numeric keypad, and press .
An alarm sounds when the GPS positioning HDOP value exceeds the set value.

(5) TEMP

12. Press "TEMP".

13. Press to select "OFF" or "RANGE", and press .

14. Enter the water temperature with the numeric keypad, and press .
OVER: An alarm will sound when the water temperature exceeds the set value.
UNDER: An alarm will sound when the water temperature falls below the set value.
IN RANGE: An alarm will sound when the water temperature is within the set range.
OUT RANGE: An alarm will sound when the water temperature is outside the set range.
Water temperature data must be obtained from externally connected equipment for the water
temperature alarm to be used.

(6) DEPTH

15. Press "DEPTH".

16. Press to select "OFF" or "RANGE", and press .

17. Enter the water depth with the numeric keypad, and press .
OVER: An alarm will sound when the water depth exceeds the set value.
UNDER: An alarm will sound when the water depth falls below the set value.
IN RANGE: An alarm will sound when the water depth is within the set range.
OUT RANGE: An alarm will sound when the water depth is outside the set range.
Water depth data must be obtained from externally connected equipment for the water depth
alarm to be used.

(7) TRIP

18. Press "TRIP".

19. Press to select "OFF" or "SET", and press .

20. Use the numeric keypad to enter the trip distance, and press .
An alarm will sound if the set trip distance value is exceeded. The trip distance is calculated
using the total distance over ground from Navigation Assistance 1 screen.

4-76
(8) SPD

21. Press "SPD".

22. Press to select "OFF" or "RANGE", and press .

23. Enter the speed with the numeric keypad, and press .
OVER: An alarm will sound when the speed exceeds the set value.
UNDER: An alarm will sound when the speed falls below the set value.
IN RANGE: An alarm will sound when the speed is within the set range.
OUT RANGE: An alarm will sound when the speed is outside the set range.

4.11.2 Setting Alarm Sounds

· Individual alarm sounds can be set for each item.

· If the alarm is set to "OFF" in the alarm settings, the alarm sound cannot be set, but even if the
alarm is set to "ON", the alarm sound itself can be set to "OFF". In that case, when the alarm
occurs, no alarm sound will play, but a blinking alarm icon will appear.
· When an alarm sound is set, the "♪" icon will appear on the alarm screen.
· You can preview the alarm sound when setting it.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the alarm sound screen.

Only items whose alarms have been set will be displayed.

Set alarm sound

2. Select the alarm you wish to set with the numeric keypad.
3. Press to select the alarm sound, and then press .

The following will be displayed. Press to hear the alarm sound.

Press again to stop the alarm sound.

Play alarm sound with

4-77
4.12 Navigation Assistance

4.12.1 Measuring the Trip Distance and Time During Navigation (Navigation
Assistance 1)

· Navigation Assistance 1 shows the time when measurement started, the time measurement
ended, the total time, and the total distance over ground. If the speed through water is input
from external equipment, the distance through water is also displayed.
· When measurement is started, the time that measurement was started is displayed, and the
total time and total distance will gradually increase.
· When measurement is stopped, the time that measurement was stopped is displayed, as well
as the total time and total distance.
· To start measurement, start navigation, or start measurement from the Navigation Assistance 1
screen.
· Stop measurement from the Navigation Assistance 1 screen.
· Measurement does not stop even if navigation is stopped. This allows total time and distance
to be measured even when routes are changed during navigation.

Navigation Assistance 1 Screen

(Refer to "3.1.9 Navigation Assistance Screen" for screen details)
Procedure

(1) Starting Measurement

1. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance screen.

2. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance 1 screen.

3. The cursor will move to "NAV START/END", so press .

(2) Ending Measurement

1. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance screen.

2. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance 1 screen.

3. The cursor will move to "NAV START/END", so press .

Memo
· Measurement starts automatically when navigation is started.
· In order to perform distance through water, speed through water must be input from
externally connected equipment.

4-78
4.12.2 Measuring the Trip Distance and Time (Navigation Assistance 2)

· Navigation Assistance 2 shows the time when measurement started, the time measurement
ended, the total time, the average speed during measurement, and the distance over ground. If
the speed through water is input from external equipment, the speed through water is also
displayed.
· When measurement is started, the time that measurement was started is displayed, and the
total time, the average speed and total distance will gradually increase.
· When measurement is stopped, the time that measurement was stopped is displayed, as well
as the total time and distance.
· To start measurement, start measurement from the Navigation Assistance 2 screen.
· Stop measurement from the Navigation Assistance 2 screen.

Navigation Assistance 2 Screen

(Refer to "3.1.9 Navigation Assistance Screen" for screen details)
Procedure

(1) Starting Measurement

1. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance screen.

2. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance 2 screen.

3. The cursor will move to the "SOG NAV START/END", so press to start measurement
of distance over ground.
4. Pressing will cause the cursor to move to "STW NAV START/END", so press to
start measurement of distance through water.

(2) Ending Measurement

1. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance screen.

2. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance 2 screen.
3. The cursor will move to "SOG NAV START/END", so press to end measurement of distance
over ground.
4. Pressing will cause the cursor to move to "STW NAV START/END", so press to
end measurement of distance through water.

Memo
· In order to perform distance through water, speed through water must be input from
externally connected equipment.

4-79
4.12.3 Measuring the Distance and Bearing Between 2 Points (Navigation
Assistance 4)

· Navigation Assistance 4 allows you to specify a start point and an end point, and calculate the
distance and bearing between the two points.
· The start and end points can be selected from the following 5 items.
(1) Own ship’s position
(2) Specified latitude and longitude
(3) Cursor position
(4) Waypoint list:
(5) Event/mark list

Navigation Assistance 4 Screen

(Refer to "3.1.9 Navigation Assistance Screen" for screen details)
Procedure

1. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance screen.

2. Press several times to display the Navigation Assistance 4 screen.

3. The cursor will move to "STARTING POINT", so press .

4. Press to select the start point selection method, and press .

(1) If you select "OWN SHIP", the latitude and longitude of your ship position will be
displayed.
(2) If you select "LAT/LON", the cursor will move to the latitude and longitude position, so
please enter your desired latitude and longitude values.
(3) If you select "CURSOR", the plot screen will be displayed, so move the cursor to select
the desired position.
(4) If you select "WPT LIST", the waypoint list will be displayed, so move the cursor to
select the desired waypoint.
(5) If you select "EVENT LIST", the event/mark list will be displayed, so move the cursor to
select the desired event/mark.

5. The cursor will move to "TERMINAL POINT", so press .

6. Press to select the end point selection method, and press .

Select the end point using the same procedures provided for selecting start points.
7. The cursor will move to "SAIL GC/RL", so press .

8. Press to select the distance measurement method, and press .

For distance calculation, select RL for "RHUMB LINE" measurement, and GC for "GREAT
CIRCLE" measurement.
9. The distance and bearing between the specified start and end points will be displayed.
When GC is selected as the distance measurement method, bearing is not displayed.
4-80
4.13 Beacon Information
When the beacon information is set to "ON" based on "4.16.8 Setting Beacon/SBAS", the beacon
information (Type 16 message) from the beacon broadcast stations can be displayed.
Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then .

2. Press "BEACON INFORMATION", press to select "ON", and press .

3. Press several times to display the beacon information screen.

Memo
· The beacon information is not limited to information obtained from every beacon
broadcast station.

4-81
4.14 Display Settings
If "1.DISPLAY" is selected on the main menu, the display menu will be displayed. On the display
menu, you can set the contrast, dimmer, click sound, reversed display, input assistance, and
screen display.

The following is an overview of each submenu.

(1) CONTRAST: You can set the LCD contrast.
(2) DIMMER: You can set the LCD's brightness levels.
(3) CLICK SOUND: You can turn the click sound when keys are pressed on or off.
(4) REVERSING MODE: You can switch the display's black/white setting.
(5) INPUT ASSIST: You can turn screen display of the characters assigned to the
numeric keypad on or off.
(6) DISPLAY SELECT: You can set which screen is displayed, and which screen is shown
on startup.

4.14.1 Adjusting Contrast

· You can set the LCD contrast.

· Contrast value 1 is the highest amount of contrast, while 13 is the least amount of contrast.
· The default value is 7.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "CONTRAST".

2. Press to adjust the contrast, and press .

4.14.2 Adjusting Brightness

· Brightness adjustment can be performed by pressing to select bright, medium, dark, or

off.
Here, you can set the levels for each brightness level.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then and select "DIMMER".

2. Press to increase or decrease the value by one. The screen brightness will
change at the same time.
3. Press . (Medium and Dark can be adjusted the same way.)
4-82
 Memo
· Set the highest value for "Bright", and the smallest value for "Dark".
· The key brightness setting changes in accordance with the dimmer setting.

4.14.3 Setting the Click Sound

· You can turn the key operation click sound on or off.

ON: The click sound is enabled
OFF: The click sound is disabled

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "CLICK SOUND".

2. Press to select "ON" or "OFF" and press .

4.14.4 Setting Reversed Display

· The black/white display can be reversed.

NORMAL: The letters are black. (The background is white)
REVERSE1: The letters are white. (The background is black)
REVERSE2: The letters are white, and the letters on the status bar are black.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "REVERSING MODE".

2. Select the reversal mode with , and press .

Normal Reverse1 Reverse2

4-83
4.14.5 Input Assistance Settings

· Input assistance display can be turned on or off.

ON: Input assistance display enabled
OFF: Input assistance display disabled

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "INPUT ASSIST".

2. Press to select "ON" or "OFF", and press .

4.14.6 Selecting the Display Screen

· You can select which screen is displayed.

· Set screens which you wish to display to "ON", and screens which you do not wish to display to
"OFF".
· You can set the navigation information , PLOT1, PLOT2, PLOT3, CDI, or GPS information
screens to be displayed when the unit is started. Set the screen you wish to display on startup
to "START".
· Only one screen can be set to "START". To change the "START" screen, change the value of
the currently set "START" screen to something other than "START" before setting the new
"START" screen.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "DISPLAY SELECT".

2. Enter the number of the screen you wish to set with the numeric keypad.
4. Press to select "START", "OFF", or "ON", and press .

4-84
4.15 System Settings
· Select "5. SYSTEM" on the main menu to display the system settings screen.

The following is an overview of each submenu.

(1) TIME DIFF: To display the time at the current location, enter the difference between the
local time and UTC.
(2) DATE DISP: Select " 'YY-MM-DD", "DD MM, 'YY", or "MM DD, 'YY".
(3) TIME DISP: You can select 24 hour or 12 hour display.
(4) DATUM: You can select a geodetic system from the list in "Appendix 1 Geodetic
Systems".
(5) UNIT - DIST/SPEED: You can choose units of "NM, kn", "km, km/h", or "mi, mi/h".
(6) UNIT - HEIGHT/DEPTH: You can select m, ft, or fm.
(7) UNIT - TEMPERATURE: You can select ℃ or ℉ .
(8) MAG CORR: You can select automatic or manual magnetic correction, or turn magnetic
correction off.
(9) SPEED Meter: You can set the maximum value of the analogue speed meter on the
CDI screen.

4.15.1 Setting the Time Difference

· You can set the time difference between your current location and UTC.
An YY denotes a year, an MM denotes a month, and a DD denotes a day.
· For Japan, the time difference is +9 hours, so you would input +09:00.
· When a time difference is set, the local time will be displayed (shown with an "L").
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "TIME DIFF".

2. Select + or - with , enter the time with the numeric keypad, and press .

4.15.2 Setting the Date Display

· You can set the date display format to " 'YY-MM-DD", "DD MM, 'YY", or "MM DD, 'YY".
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "DATE DISP".

2. Select the display format with , and press .

4-85
4.15.3 Setting the Time Display

· You can select 24 hour or 12 hour time display.

· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "TIME DISP".

2. Select the display format with , and press .

4.15.4 Setting the Geodetic System

· You can select the geodetic system to use.

· You can choose between 47 types of geodetic systems. Please refer to "Appendix 1 Geodetic
Systems" for details.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "DATUM".

2. Select the geodetic system with , and press .

4.15.5 Setting Distance and Speed Units

You can select "NM, kn", "km, km/h", or "mi, mi/h" for distance and speed units.
Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "UNIT - DIST/SPEED".

2. Select the units with , and press .

4.15.6 Setting Height and Depth Units

· You can select m, ft, or fm for height and depth units.

· If you select fm, enter the conversion value from "m". The default value is 1 fm = 1.8288 m.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "HEIGHT/DEPTH".

2. Select the units with , and press .

If you select fm, you must enter the conversion value from "m".
3. Press to select "SET", enter the conversion value with the numeric keypad, and

press .

4-86
 Enter calculated
value and press

To keep the default value, or restore the unit to the default value, select "DEFAULT".

4.15.7 Setting Temperature Units

· You can set the temperature unit to ºC or ºF.

· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "TEMPERATURE".

2. Select the units with , and press .

4.15.8 Setting Magnetic Correction

· You can set the method of magnetic correction to be automatic or manual, or turn magnetic
correction off.
· If you select automatic, correction is automatically calculated for the correction value from the
GPS position.
· If you select manual, correction is performed using a manually entered value.
· If you turn magnetic correction off, no correction is performed.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "MAG CORR".

2. Select the correction method with , and press .

When Manual is selected
3. Select E/W using , enter the correction value with the numeric keypad, and press

4-87
4.15.9 Setting the Maximum Analogue Speed Meter Value

· You can set the maximum value of the CDI screen analogue speed meter.
· Set the value to one appropriate for the ship in which the unit is installed. The maximum value
is 100 kn.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Analog Speed
Meter

Maximum Value

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "SPEED METER".

2. Enter the speed with the numeric keypad, and press .

4-88
4.16 GPS/Beacon/SBAS Settings
· Select "6. GPS/BEACON/SBAS" on the main menu to display the GPS/beacon/SBAS settings
screen.
The items which can be set will vary depending on the connected sensor.

The following is an overview of each submenu.

(1) GPS MODE: You can select AUTO (JLR-7800 only), GPS Alone, Beacon, or SBAS.
(2) FIX MODE: You can select AUTO, 3D, or 2D.
(3) SAT ELV MASK: You can limit which satellite(s) you use based on the angle.
(4) HDOP: You can set the measured HDOP.
(5) SMOOTHING - POSITION: You can set position smoothing.
(6) SMOOTHING - SPEED: You can set speed smoothing.
(7) SMOOTHING - COURSE: You can set course smoothing.
(8) RAIM ACCURACY LEVEL: You can set the RAIM accuracy level used.
(9) GPS INITIALIZATION: You can perform sensor initialization.
(10) BEACON/SBAS: You can perform beacon and SBAS settings.
(11) LORAN: You can display a position based on the time difference (Loran A/C).

Memo
· RAIM
Abbreviation of Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. This system automatically
detects failed satellites and deselects their positioning data from calculations. Including
data from failed satellites will result in a decrease in positioning accuracy; the RAIM
accuracy standard indicates the accuracy degradation base for removal of failed satellites
from positioning calculations.

4.16.1 Setting the GPS Mode

· You can set the GPS mode to AUTO, GPS alone, beacon, or SBAS.
· The sensor must support SBAS to use SBAS positioning mode.
The selections are as follows:
(1) AUTO: The best method is selected from GPS alone, SBAS, and beacon.
(2) GPS Alone: Positioning is performed using only the GPS. SBAS positioning and
beacon-based DGPS positioning is not performed.
(3) BEACON: Beacon based DGPS or GPS only positioning is performed. SBAS
positioning is not performed.
(4) SBAS: SBAS or GPS only positioning is performed. Beacon-based DGPS positioning is
not performed.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "GPS MODE".

2. Select the GPS mode with , and press .

4-89
4.16.2 Setting the Fixing Mode

· You can set Fix mode to AUTO, 3D, or 2D.

· The selections are as follows:
(1) AUTO: Positioning mode is automatically switched between 3D and 2D, with the
optimal method being used.
(2) 3D: 3D positioning is performed.
(3) 2D: 2D positioning is performed.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "FIX MODE".

2. Select the positioning mode with , and press .

4.16.3 Setting the Elevation Mask

· If the elevation mask is set, satellites at an elevation lower than the set value will not be used in
positioning.
· The elevation mask can be set between 5 and 89 degrees.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "SAT ELV MASK".

2. Use the numeric keypad to enter the elevation mask, and press .

4.16.4 Setting HDOP

· If HDOP is set, positioning is only performed if HDOP is lower than the set value.
· HDOP can be set to 4, 10, or 20.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "HDOP".

2. Press to select the HDOP value, and then press .

4-90
4.16.5 Setting Position, Speed, and Course Smoothing

· Smoothing can be applied to measured positions, speeds, and courses.

· The higher the smoothing value, the smoother the results will be, but the greater the time lag.
Conversely, if the smoothing value is set low, a great number of changes will occur, but there
will be little time lag. As such, it is important to choose the optimal value for your own usage
situation.
· Smoothing values can be set between 0 and 99 seconds.
· Smoothing can be set individually for position, speed, and course on the JLR-4341.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "SMOOTHING".

(1) When Position, Speed, and Course can be Individually Set

2. Press to select position, speed, or course, and then press .

3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the smoothing value, and press .

(2) When Position, Speed, and Course can not be Individually Set

2. Use the numeric keypad to enter the smoothing value, and press .

Attention
· Setting a high smoothing level to position and speed, can cause the receiver to react
slowly to fast turns and sudden speed changes.
A setting of less than 10 seconds is recommended for normal circumstances, default is
10 seconds. Higher settings must be used in caution.

4.16.6 Setting RAIM

· Receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM) is an integrity monitoring which determine if

GPS accuracy is within the performance standards to provide an integrity indication.
The integrity indications with a confidence level above 95% for different position accuracy
levels are expressed in two states: "safe" and "unsafe".
In the case of the confidence level under 95%, the indication is expressed "caution".
Safe: position error is within the selected accuracy level.
Caution: insufficient information to reliably calculate for the selected accuracy level.
the probability of false alarms is large or the probability of not detecting an error
condition is large.
Unsafe: position error exceeds the selected accuracy level.
· You can set the RAIM accuracy level.
· You can choose "OFF", "10m", "30m", "50m", or "100m" as accuracy levels.
Set to 30 m or greater when GPS positioning is used alone. If GPS-only positioning is used
with a setting of 10 m, then the 95% reliability condition will not be met, and a "CAUTION" may
occur.
· If you choose accuracy level "OFF", "RAIM OFF" displays on the screen and the RAIM function
will turn off. During "OFF" status, no calculations as to the integrity status of satellites are
made.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

4-91
Procedure

1. Press , , and then to select "RAIM ACCURACY LEVEL".

2. Press to select the accuracy level value, and then press .

4.16.7 Initializing the GPS

· GPS initialization can be performed.

· The submenus on the GPS initialization screen are as described below.

(1) LATITUDE: Enter the approximate ship latitude.
(2) LONGITUDE: Enter the approximate ship longitude.
(3) ANT HEIGHT: Enter the height above the draft line of the sensor. This height is used in
2D positioning. It is not used in 3D positioning.
(4) DATE: Enter the current date in UTC.
(5) TIME: Enter the current time in UTC.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the GPS initialization screen.

2. Select the item you wish to set with the numeric keypad, enter each value using the numeric
keypad, and press .

3. Press "SET".

4-92
4.16.8 Setting Beacon/SBAS

Beacon and SBAS settings can be performed.

The sensor must support SBAS to perform SBAS settings.

· The submenus on the beacon/SBAS settings screen are as follow.

(1) STATION SELECT: Set the beacon station selection method.
AUTO: The best beacon station is selected automatically from the GPS
position.
MANUAL: You can set the frequency and bit rate manually.
(2) FREQUENCY: Set the frequency when station selection is set to manual.
(3) BIT RATE: Set the bit rate when station selection is set to manual.
(4) BEACON INFORMATION: Set to "ON" to display received beacon information.
(5) SBAS SEARCH: The SBAS satellite can be set.
AUTO: The SBAS satellite is automatically set.
MANUAL: The SBAS satellite number is set manually.
(6) TYPE 0 INFORMATION: Set whether test broadcast data is used.
ON: Used.
OFF: Not used. (default)
(7) RANGING: You can set whether SBAS satellite information are used like
GPS satellites in positioning.
ON: Used.
OFF: Not used. (default)
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.
Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the Beacon/SBAS setting screen.

(1) Setting Beacon station

2. Press "STATION SELECT".

3. Press to select the method, and press .

If set to Manual, "2. FREQUENCY" and "3. BIT RATE" can be selected.
Press "FREQUENCY".

Enter the frequency with the numeric keypad, and press .

Press "BIT RATE".

Press to select the bit rate, and press .

(2) Setting Beacon Information

Refer to "4.13 Beacon Information".

4-93
(3) Setting SBAS Satellites

4. Press "SBAS SEARCH".

5. Press to select the search method, and press .

If set to Manual, the SBAS satellite number can be selected.
Press to select the SBAS satellite number, and press .

(4) Setting Type 0 Information

6. Press "TYPE 0 INFORMATION".

7. Press to select "ON" or "OFF" and press .

(5) Setting Ranging

8. Press "RANGING".

9. Press to select "ON" or "OFF", and press .

4-94
4.16.9 Setting LORAN A/C

· Position displays and settings can be performed based on time differences.

· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , and then to display the LORAN setting screen.

2. Press "LORAN A/C".

3. Press to set the time difference display, and press .

The time difference display settings are as follow.

(1) OFF: Latitude and longitude is displayed.
(2) LORAN A: Switches to the LORAN A setting screen.
(3) LORAN C: Switches to the LORAN C setting screen.

LORAN A LORAN C

4. The LORAN A or LORAN C setting screens are displayed.

5. Select the item you wish to set with the numeric keypad.
6. Enter each value with the numeric keypad or , and press .

Memo

· Configurable LORAN A stations:

1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 1S6 1L0 1L1 1L4 1L5 2S0 2S1 2S2 2S3 2S4 2S5 2S6 2S7 2H4 2H5
2H6

· Configurable LORAN C chains:

4990 5930 5970 5980 5990 6730 6731 6780 7001 7030 7170 7270 7430 7499 7930
7950 7960 7970 7980 7990 8000 8290 8390 8830 8930 8970 8990 9007 9610 9930
9940 9960 9970 9980 9990

4-95
4.17 Version Display
· The GPS sensor and display version number can be displayed.
· The details of each submenu are shown below.
(1) SENSOR
(1-1) SERIAL No.: The serial number of the GPS sensor is displayed.
(1-2) BARCODE: The GPS sensor barcode number is displayed.
(1-3) VERSION: The GPS core version number is displayed.
(1-4) CONTROLLER: The controller version number is displayed.
(2) DISPLAY
(2-1) SERIAL No.: The serial number of the display is displayed.
(2-2) BARCODE: The display barcode number is displayed.
(2-3) VERSION: The display version number is displayed.
(2-4) IP: The display IP address is displayed.

Procedure

1. Press and then , select "VERSION".

4-96
4.18 Language Settings
· Select "8. LANGUAGE" on the main menu to display the language settings screen.
· You can select English or Japanese.
· Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment configuration
mode.

Procedure

1. Press , , then to select "LANGUAGE".

2. Select the language with , and press .

4-97
4.19 Print
･ When # key is pressed to print, ship information is printed on DPU-414 Printer.
･ To print with the # key is DPU-414 printer exclusive use. Please operate the printer when
printing on NKG-84 Printer.
· The # key can be used from any screen other than the menu screen, waypoint information
screen, or Navigation Assistance 4 screen.
･ To print, please switch DATA IN/OUT1 setting to "PRINTER" .

4.19.1 Ship information is printed when it is necessary

Procedure

1. Press .
2. The following will be displayed. Press to select "YES", and press .

Ship information is printed.

4.19.2 Setting the output interval

･ The output interval is set, and it is possible to print regularly.

･ You can choose "1 min", "3 min", "5 min", "10 min", "20 min", "30 min", "60 min", "OFF" and
"ONCE" as interval time.
･ If "OFF" is selected, data is not output. If "ONCE" is selected, data is output one time.

Procedure

1. Press and hold for 3 seconds.

2. Press "INTERVAL".

3. Press to select interval time and press .

4-98
4.20 Equipment Configuration
· In order to change settings or perform installation configuration, you must switch the unit to
equipment configuration mode.
· When the unit is in equipment configuration mode, " " will be displayed at the top left of
the title bar.

Procedure

1. Press and hold and for 3 seconds, and " " will appear at the top left of
the title bar, indicating that the unit is now in equipment configuration mode.
"0. EQUIP SET" will appear on the main menu screen. Press to display the
equipment configuration menu.

Press and hold and (3 seconds)

or
equipment configuration menu

Memo

· Pressing or on the equipment configuration menu will return to the main

menu.
· Equipment configuration mode will end when one of the following occurs:
- when is pressed again on the main menu screen.
- when the power is turned off
· When making settings, check that the unit is in equipment configuration mode.

4-99
4.20.1 Setting the Display Type

· You can set whether the display is the main display connected to the GPS sensor, or a
sub-display.
· Set the display connected to the GPS sensor as "MAIN".
· Set the display used as a sub-display as "SUB".

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "DISPLAY TYPE".

3. Press to select "MAIN" or "SUB", and press .

If the unit is set to be the sub-display, " " will appear at the top right of the title bar.

Memo
· Settings cannot be performed for the GPS sensor from the sub-display.

4.20.2 Setting the GPS Sensor Number

· A number can be assigned to each GPS when there is more than one GPS sensor.
· This number is used for IP address management of each display, and for GPS identification
when outputting data, so always perform GPS number configuration.
· When only 1 GPS is used, set the number to No1.
· Set a number for each display type, main and sub. Sub-displays are not connected to GPS
sensors, but must be set.
· Always set numbers in order starting from No1.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "SENSOR No.".

3. Enter the number with the numeric keypad, and press .

The number will appear at the top right of the title bar.

4-100
4.20.3 Setting Sensor Position / CCRP

· You can set the ship size, CCRP position, and GPS sensor position.
· The CCRP position and GPS position are set on a coordinate system with the center of the
ship as the point where the axes cross.
· Set the ship size (ship length and width), and set the CCRP position and GPS sensor position.
· The set CCRP position can be output to externally connected equipment. For output, refer to
"4.20.7 Data I/O Settings ", and select "CCRP" as the output sentence.
To output to external equipment, the equipment must have CCRP send / receive functionality.
· CCRP cannot be set from a sub-display. Set CCRP from the main display.

The CCRP position can be received. If the set position and received position differ, the
following alert will occur, so please perform the settings again. A "*" will appear on the status
bar until the settings have been redone.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "CCRP" to display the CCRP settings screen.

3. Press "SHIP".

4. Press to set the value to "ENABLE", and press .

5. Select the ship width and length, enter the values with the numeric keypad, and press
.
6. The SENSOR and CCRP x and y values are set in the same way.

Memo
· If the sensor position does not fit within the ship, the sensor position will change to
"DISABLE". Perform settings again such that the position is within the ship, and
change the setting to "ENABLE". The same is true for the CCRP position.

4-101
4.20.4 Equipment Check

· An equipment check can be performed for the GPS sensor and the display.
(1) Input port check
(2) Self-diagnosis
(3) Error log display and output
(4) Setting value output

4.20.4.1 Input Port Check

The display has 4 input ports (input from sensor, data IN1, IN4, and LAN).
The data being received by each port can be displayed.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "CHECK".

3. Press to select "INPUT DATA" and press .

4. Press "PORT SELECTION".

5. Press to select the port you wish to display, and press to confirm the port.

6. Press to display the input data, and to stop the data display.

4.20.4.2 Performing Self-diagnosis

· Self-diagnosis can be performed for the display, sensor, and LCD display.
The submenus are outlined below.
(1) DISPLAY: Self-diagnosis is performed for the buzzer after completion of self-diagnosis
for ROM, RAM, serial ports, and LAN ports.
(2) SENSOR: Self-diagnosis is performed for the antenna, ROM, and RAM within the
sensor. This function only available on JLR-7800
(3) LCD: Self-diagnosis is performed for the LCD display.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "CHECK".

3. Press to select "DIAGNOSIS".

4. Select the diagnosis target with the numeric keypad.
5. Press to select "START", and then press .

4-102
6. The diagnosis results will be displayed.

After self-diagnosis has been performed for the screen, the entire screen is highlighted
repeatedly such as black to white, white to black. Check if some dots are omitted.
If you wish to stop the operation, press .

Attention
If the results were not good, contact JRC or its affiliate.

4.20.4.3 Displaying and Outputting Error Logs

· Up to 100 recent errors can be displayed. They can also be output externally.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "CHECK".

3. Press to select "ERROR LOG", and then press .

The error log will be displayed.
3. If you want to output the log, press and set output settings.

4. Set the output port and bit rate, and press "SEND" to output the log in text format.

4.20.4.4 Outputting Settings

· Current setting values can be output. This function is for use by service engineer.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "CHECK".

3. Press to select "CONFG OUT", and then press .

4. Set the output port and bit rate, and press "SEND" to output the log in binary format.

4-103
4.20.5 Performing a Master Reset (Reset)

· The GPS sensor, display, or both can be reset.

· Resetting will restore all settings to their default values.
· To reset the display, select "ALL" or "EXCEPT FOR LISTS".
If "EXCEPT FOR LISTS" is selected, everything except the waypoint list, the route list, and the
event / mark list will be reset.
If "ALL" is selected, the display will be reset, and the waypoint list, route list, and event / mark
list will be deleted.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "RESET".

3. Press to select the equipment to reset, and then press .

(1) If "SENSOR" is selected, a master reset of the GPS sensor will be performed.
(2) If "DISPLAY" is selected, the display will be reset. Select "ALL" or "EXCEPT FOR LISTS",
and press .
(3) If "ALL" is selected, a master reset of the GPS sensor will be performed, and the display will
also be reset.
The display lists will also be reset.

4.20.6 Performing a Demo

· The unit can perform a demo, where it behaves as if it is actually functioning, even without
GPS reception.
· The following is an overview of the demo type submenu.
(1) STATIC: Keeps at set position.
(2) STRAIGHT: Goes in set straight line at constant speed.
(3) RIGHT: Turns right at set turn radius.
(4) LEFT: Turns left at set turn radius.
(5) ROUTE: Performs selected route. Moves at set speed from set position to route start
point.
(6) AUTO: Moves in set direction a set distance from set position.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press , and then to select "DEMO TYPE".

3. Select demo type with , and press .

4. Enter the demo type operation base values with the numeric keypad.
5. Press and the demo will start.

Memo

· To stop the demo, display the demo screen again, and press "STOP", or turn
the power off.
· When the demo is being performed, "S" will blink at the bottom right of the screen.
· When the demo is being performed, "MOB" does not operate.
･ After end of demo, the setting performed during in the demo is not available.

4-104
4.20.7 Data I/O Settings

· You can confirm settings for connection with external connected equipment.
· Data input and output data consists of serial data, contact data, and LAN data.
· Output sentences, bit rate, and output intervals can be set for each port. However, some
combinations of bit rates, intervals, and numbers of sentences cannot be made. In this case,
set the sentence to the minimum needed value.
· The XTD / Boundary and Arrival / Anchor alarms are those set in "4.11 Alarm Settings".
･ To connect a Current, Temperature and Depth meter, use a input port in DATA IN/OUT4.

· The following is an overview of the serial data.

NMEA: NMEA format data output.
IEC: IEC format data output.
JRC: JRC format data output. Fixed at 1200 bps.
ROUTE: Output or input of memory route and waypoint data.
Route and waypoint data can be sent to / from externally connected
computers and equipment.
SWITCH: Outputs automatic switch (NCZ-1537A) control data.
PRINTER: Outputs printer formatted data (Data IN/OUT1 only).
EXT EQUIP: Input configuration for tidal current meter (Data IN/OUT4 only).

· The following is an overview of contact data.

SYSTEM: A contact is made when the positioning stopped alarm occurs.
SYS+XTD+ARV: Generates contact when positioning is not performed, when entering or
leaving a route, or when arriving at or departing from a waypoint.
XTD+ARV: Generates contact when entering or leaving a route, or when arriving at
or departing from a waypoint.
XTD: Generates contact when entering or leaving a route.
ARV: Generates contact when arriving at or departing from a waypoint.
200p/NM: 200 pulse/NM LOG pulse is output.
400p/NM: 400 pulse/NM LOG pulse is output.
ALARM ACK: Acknowledgment output for externally input alarm.

· The following is an overview of the LAN data.

ACTIVE ROUTE: The current active route is shared with other equipment.
DATA ROUTE: Route(s) in memory are shared with other equipment.
DATA OUT: NMEA and/or IEC data output is performed.
MUTUAL: Mutual monitoring is performed when two of this unit are connected.
When GPS positioning is not being performed, the GPS positioning
information from other units can be used.
REMOTE MAINTE: Remote maintenance data output is performed.

4-105
4.20.7.1 Configuring Data IN/OUT1

· NMEA, JRC, IEC, route WPT, automatic switch control data, and printer data can be output via
data IN/OUT1.
· To connect a DPU-414 printer, use a D-sub9 pin connector.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press , and then , and select "DATA IN/OUT1".

3. Select the data type with and press .

(1) When "NMEA" is Selected

Select the version, bit rate, output sentence, and interval.

The selected sentence is displayed. Sentence and Interval Setting Screen

If no sentence has been selected, no
sentence is displayed.

If no sentence is displayed, the output sentence has not been selected.

4. Press "SENTENCE".

5. Move the cursor to the sentence you wish to output, and press .

6. The output interval is displayed. Select the interval and press .

4-106
(2) When "IEC" is Selected

Select the bit rate, output sentence, and interval.

The selected sentence is displayed. Sentence and Interval Setting Screen

If no sentence has been selected, no
sentence is displayed.

If no sentence is displayed, the output sentence has not been selected.

4. Press "SENTENCE".

5. Move the cursor to the sentence you wish to output, and press .

6. The output interval is displayed. Select the interval and press .

(3) Selecting "ROUTE" and sending data

Saved routes and waypoints are output as RTE and WPL sentences.
Select the version, bit rate, and output type.

3. Press "DATA IN/OUT".

4. Press to select "OUT", and then press .

5. Press "BITRATE", and select the bit rate.

6. Press "FORMAT", and select the format.

"NMEA Ver1.5", "NMEA Ver2.1", and "NMEA Ver2.3" can be chosen as data formats.

4-107
7. Press "OUT TYPE", and select the data you wish to output.

Output data types:

· ALL WPT
All waypoint data in the waypoint list is output as WPL sentences.
· ALL ROUTE
All route data in the route list is output as RTE sentences.
· ALL WPT + ROUTE
All waypoint data in the waypoint list, and all route data in the route list, is output as WPL
and RTE sentences.
· ROUTE
The specified route data is output as an RTE sentence.
Route specification can be performed from the "ROUTE LIST", "ROUTE No.", or "FROM
TO".
· ROUTE + WPT
The specified route data and route waypoint data is output as RTE and WPL sentences.
Route specification can be performed from the "ROUTE LIST", "ROUTE No.", or "FROM
TO".

Select "ROUTE" or "ROUTE + WPT" as the output type, and the route selection method
will be displayed. Select one and set the route to be output.

ROUTE or ROUTE + WPT

· ROUTE LIST
The route list will be displayed. Select the route you wish to output, and press .
Multiple contiguous route numbers can be selected.
Please refer to "4.8.3 Selecting a Range within a List" for details regarding range
selection.
· ROUTE No.
Enter the route number and press .
· FROM TO
Multiple contiguous route numbers can be selected. Enter the route numbers you want to
output from the first route to the last, and press .

4-108
8. Press "START" to display the following, and press "YES" to start data output.

YES

(4) Selecting "ROUTE" and receiving data

Routes and waypoints are received from external sources as RTE and WPL sentences.
Select the bit rate.

3. Press "DATA IN/OUT".

4. Press to select "IN", and then press .

5. Press "BITRATE", and select the bit rate.

6. Press "START" to display the following, and press "YES" to enter data receiving
mode.

YES

7. Once the unit is awaiting data reception, send RTE or WPL sentences from externally
connected equipment.
Received data is stored in the internal memory.
8. When all data transmission has been completed, press .

The unit will continue awaiting data until is pressed.

4-109
(5) When "JRC" is Selected

The bit rate is fixed at 1200 bps.

(6) When "PRINTER" is Selected

Data is output in dedicated printer format.

Select the bit rate and output interval.
The bit rate is selected at 4800bps for DPU-414 Printer.
Select the interval. If "OFF" is selected, data is not output. If "ONCE" is selected, data is
output one time.

(7) When "SWITCH" is Selected

The bit rate is fixed at 4800 bps, and data is output for automatic switching control
(NCZ-1573A).

If "SWITCH" is selected when the LAN mutual monitoring mode is set to "OFF", the screen
at right will be displayed and the mutual monitoring mode will be set to "ON".

Mutual monitoring mode

is "ON"

If you do not need automatic switching control, do not set this field to "SWITCH".
4-110
4.20.7.2 Setting Data OUT2

· NMEA, JRC, IEC, route WPT, and automatic switch control data can be output via data OUT2.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment
configuration mode.
2. Press , and then to select "DATA OUT2".
From this point on, operation is identical as that described for "DATA IN/OUT1".
However, routes and waypoints can not be received from external sources as RTE and WPL
sentences.

4.20.7.3 Setting Data OUT3

· NMEA, JRC, IEC, route WPT, and automatic switch control data can be output via data OUT3.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment
configuration mode.
2. Press , and then to select "DATA OUT3".
From this point on, operation is identical as that described for "DATA IN/OUT1".
However, routes and waypoints can not be received from external sources as RTE and WPL
sentences.

4.20.7.4 Setting Data IN/OUT4

· NMEA, JRC, IEC, route, and switch data can be output via data IN/OUT4.
･ To connect Current, temperature and Depth meter, set to only bit rate and use a Pin No.1,2 in
DATA IN/OUT connector.
· The layer and data number for displaying tidal current data can be set by setting externally
connected equipment. Please refer to "4.20.7.8 Setting Tidal Current Meter Input" for setting
method.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment
configuration mode.

2. Press , and then to select "DATA IN/OUT4".

From this point on, operation is identical as that described for "DATA IN/OUT1".

4-111
4.20.7.5 Setting Contact Output 1

· The following contact outputs can be set for contact output 1: System, System + XTD + ARV,
XTD + ARV, XTD, ARV, Log Pulse (200 pulse/NM), Log Pulse (400 pulse/NM), and Alarm ACK.
· Please refer to "6.3 Cable Connection" for connection.

The following is an overview of the contact output 1 submenu.

· SYSTEM: A contact is made when the No positioning fixing alarm occurs.
· SYS+XTD+ARV: A contact is made when No positioning fixing, XTD / boundary, or arrival /
anchor alarms occur.
· XTD+ARV: A contact is made when XTD / boundary, or arrival / anchor alarms occur.
· XTD: A contact is made when XTD / boundary alarms occur.
· ARV: A contact is made when arrival / anchor alarms occur.
· 200p/NM: 200 pulse/NM LOG pulse is output.
· 400p/NM: 400 pulse/NM LOG pulse is output.
· ALARM ACK: Operates as an ACK when an alarm has been generated by externally
connected equipment.

Procedure

1. Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment
configuration mode.
2. Press , and then to select "CONTACT OUT1".

3. Select the state for which you want contact operation with , and then press

4.20.7.6 Setting Contact Output 2

· The following contact outputs can be set for contact output 2: System, System + XTD + ARV,
XTD + ARV, XTD, ARV, Log Pulse (200 pulse/NM), Log Pulse (400 pulse/NM), and Alarm ACK.
· Please refer to "6.3 Cable Connection" for connection.
1. Please refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and switch the unit to equipment
configuration mode.
2. Press , and then to select "CONTACT OUT2".
From this point on, operation is identical as that described for "CONTACT OUT1".

4-112
4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings

· LAN configuration can be performed for active route sharing, data route sharing, data output,
mutual monitoring, and remote maintenance output.
· In data output, the output NMEA sentence can be selected.
· To share active or data routes, sharing route configuration must be performed.
Set the route sharing setting to "SHARE" for data routes.
When set to "SHARE", data route reception will occur automatically.
For active routes, set the route sharing setting to "SHARE 1", "SHARE 2", "SHARE 3",
"SHARE 4" or "SHARE 5".
(1) SHARE1: If the active route is switched on the unit, the route will automatically be sent
out to connected equipment.
When a shared route is received, the route is automatically switched.
(2) SHARE2: If the active route is switched on the unit, a request is made to the user of
the unit before the route is sent. Transmission of the route to the connected
equipment is dependant on the permission of the user.
If the user has not authorized sending, the active route will only be executed
on the local unit.
When a shared route is received, the route is automatically switched.
(3) SHARE3: If the active route is switched on the unit, the route will automatically be sent
out to connected equipment.
When a shared route is received, the user is asked whether or not they want
to switch routes.
If the user does not authorize route switching, the route will not be switched.
(4) SHARE4: If the active route is switched on the unit, a request is made to the user of
the unit before the route is sent. Transmission of the route to the connected
equipment is dependant on the permission of the user.
If the user has not authorized sending, the active route will only be executed
on the local unit.
When a shared route is received, the user is asked whether or not they want
to switch routes.
If the user does not authorize route switching, the route will not be switched.
(5) SHARE5: The active route cannot be sent
When a shared route is received, the route is automatically switched.
The following icon is displayed when active routes are shared.

SHARE1 Icon: SHARE2 Icon: SHARE3 Icon: SHARE4 Icon:

SHARE5 Icon:

· To perform mutual monitoring, mutual monitoring mode must be configured. With mutual
monitoring mode, when GPS positioning is not being performed, the GPS positioning
information from other units can be displayed.
· Remote maintenance output configuration can be used to regularly output data for use in
remote maintenance.

LAN setting pull-down

Data output setting

ACTIVE route sharing setting
DATA route sharing setting
Mutual monitoring mode setting
Remote maintenance output setting

LAN Selection Screen

4-113
Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press , then , and select "LAN".

(1) Data route sharing setting

3. Press to select "DATA ROUTE", and press .

4. Press to select "SHARE", and press .

Select "OFF" to disable sharing.

Data Route Selection Screen

(2) Active route sharing setting

3. Press to select "ACTIVE ROUTE", and press .

4. Press to select "SHARE1", "SHARE2", "SHARE3", "SHARE4", or "SHARE5", and

press to display the connection destination screen.

Select "OFF" to disable sharing.

Select "SHARE1",
"SHARE2",
"SHARE3",
"SHARE4", or
"SHARE5"

Sharing
Icon

Connection Destination Screen

5. Press "CONNECT", select the destination, and press .

Normally, "MULTICAST" should be selected for the destination.
To send to a specific unit, select "UNICAST".
6. When "UNICAST" is selected, press and to select the destination IP "2.TO IP"
and "3.PORT No.".

4-114
(3) Data output setting

3. Press to select "DATA OUT", and press .

4. Press "CONNECT".

5. Select the connection destination with , and press .

"MULTICAST", "UNICAST", or "BROADCAST" can be set as connection destinations.
Normally, "MULTICAST" should be selected.
When "UNICAST" is selected, destination IP "2. To IP" and "3. Port No." can be set.
6. Press "FORMAT".

7. Press , select the data format, and press .

"IEC", "NMEA Ver1.5", "NMEA Ver2.1", and "NMEA Ver2.3" can be chosen as data formats.
8. Press "SENTENCE".

9. Press to select the output sentence, and press .

10. Press to select the sentence output interval, and press .

11. After you have selected all sentences you wish to output, press .

(4) Mutual monitoring mode setting

3. Select "MUTUAL" with , and press .

4. Press to select "ON", and then press .

To stop mutual monitoring, select "OFF".

When "ON" is selected, and select "CONNECT". Normally, "MULTICAST" should be
selected.

4-115
(5) Remote maintenance data output setting

3. Use to select "REMOTE MAINTE", and press .

4. Press to select "ON", and then press .

5. Press "CONNECT".

6. Select the connection destination with , and press .

"MULTICAST", "UNICAST", or "BROADCAST" can be set as connection destinations.
When "UNICAST" is selected, destination IP "2. To IP" and "3. Port No." can be set.
Normally, "UNICAST", "To IP : 192.168.60.3" and "port No : 6001" should be selected.
7. Press "INTERVAL".

8. Press to select the output period, and press .

4.20.7.8 Setting Tidal Current Meter Input

· You can perform tidal current meter input settings.

· Data need to be entered starting with DATA IN4.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press , and then to select "DATA IN/OUT4".

3. Select "EXT EQUIP" with , and press .

4. The tidal current meter input screen will be displayed.
You can select the layer and data number you wish to display.

4-116
4.20.8 Setting the IP Address

· The display's IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway can be set. The MAC address can
be displayed.

Procedure

1. Refer to "4.20 Equipment Configuration" and display the equipment configuration menu.
2. Press "IP".

(1) IP ADDRESS Configuration

3. Press "IP ADDR".

4. Press to select "INPUT", and press .

5. Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad, and press .

To return the value to the default value, select "DEFAULT" and press .

(2) SUBNET MASK Configuration

6. Press "SUBNET MASK".

7. Press to select "INPUT", and press .

8. Enter the subnet mask with the numeric keypad, and press .

To return the value to the default value, select "DEFAULT" and press .

(3) DEFAULT GATEWAY Configuration

9. Press "DEFAULT GATEWAY".

10. Press to select "INPUT", and press .

11. Enter the default gateway with the numeric keypad, and press .

To return the value to the default value, select "DEFAULT" and press .

4-117
4-118
 Section ５ Maintenance and Inspection
Proper maintenance may greatly affect the lifespan of the equipment. In order to maintain the
equipment in peak state, perform the following regularly.

WARNING
Do not perform internal inspections or modifications of the equipment.
Inspection or modification by unauthorized personnel may result in fire,
electric shock, or equipment failure. Please consult with JRC or an
affiliate to perform internal inspections or repair.

CAUTION
Do not use benzine, alcohol or thinner when caring this equipment.
Doing so may result in removing the paint or changing of properties.
Wipe off the grime lightly with a dry soft cloth.

Use only the specified fuse.

Failure to do so may result in fire or equipment failure.

Use only the specified batteries.

Failure to do so may result in equipment failure or malfunction.

5.1 General Maintenance and Inspection

・Operate the equipment under standard power voltage levels (DC 10.8 - 31.2 V).

・The following shows general maintenance and inspection methods using standard tools.

No. Item Maintenance and Inspection

Clean the panel screen, knobs, and switches with a soft cloth.
1 Cleaning
There are no gears in the unit, so oil lubrication is unnecessary.
Check for loose screws, nuts, and connectors, and connect securely any
2 Parts Securing
that have loosened.

Perform inspection of the displayed items when the equipment is functioning normally. Compare
operating results to the normal operation values in order to detect problems quickly.

5-1
5.2 Alarms
Refer to 4.2.7 and check if any alarm is given or not. If it is, check the details referring to the list
shown below.

Alarm List
Message Message Contents Alarm Causes
Number
001 No Fix No Fix
002 HDOP OVER HDOP value has been exceeded setting level
003 GPS Antenna Open GPS Antenna Open(Sensor)
004 GPS Antenna Short GPS Antenna Short(Sensor)
005 Core ROM Error Memory Error(GPS core of Sensor)
006 Core RAM Error Memory Error(GPS core of Sensor)
007 Core RTC Error RTC(Real Time Clock) Error(GPS core of Sensor)
008 Controller ROM Error Memory Error(Processing Unit of Sensor)
009 Controller RAM Error Memory Error(Processing Unit of Sensor)
010 Controller FPGA Error FPGA Error(Processing Unit of Sensor)
011 Controller Backup Error Data Buck up Error(Processing Unit of Sensor)
012 Flash ROM Access Error Flash ROM Deletion, Write Error(ROM[1])
013 Flash ROM2 Access Error Flash ROM Deletion, Write Error(ROM[2])
014 RAM Access Error RAM Read, Write Error
015 SIO(0) Error Serial Port Error(GPS/DGPS)
016 SIO(1) Error Serial Port Error(DATA OUT1)
017 SIO(2) Error Serial Port Error(DATA OUT2)
018 SIO(3) Error Serial Port Error(DATA OUT3)
019 SIO(4) Error Serial Port Error(DATA OUT4)
020 LAN Error LAN Port Error
021 No Sensor Data Sensor periodic input not possible（Position
measurement data unobtainable）
030 Temperature Alarm Temperature alarm is occurred
031 Depth Alarm Depth alarm is occurred
032 Dist Alarm Trip alarm is occurred
033 Speed Alarm Speed alarm is occurred
040 Sensor Data Invalid Sensor data is invalid(Position, Time, etc,)
041 Sensor IF error Sensor unconfigurable
(Configuration not possible)
042 No Mutual Data Unable to obtain mutual data
043 CCRP Discrepancy CCRP disagreement with other equipment
050 Arrival Wpt Arrival at final waypoint
051 Anchor Out Anchor alarm is occurred
052 Boundary Boundary alarm is occurred
053 Xtd XTD alarm is occurred
060 Inner Error Display inside Error

5-2
5.3 Troubleshooting

5.3.1 Troubleshooting

WARNING
Do not perform internal inspections or modifications of the equipment.
Inspection or modification by unauthorized personnel may result in fire, electric
shock, or equipment failure. Please consult with JRC or an affiliate to perform
internal inspections or repair.

The following is reference information concerning identification of problems.

Problem Behavior Possible Causes Troubleshooting Measures

The power does not turn on Power is not being supplied Check the cabling from the junction
when the power switch is by the ship junction box. box.
pressed.
Power is not being supplied Check the power supply unit cabling.
by the power supply
equipment (option).
The fuse connected to the If there are no problems in the cabling,
power cable has blown. replace the fuse.
The power supply equipment If there are no problems in the cabling,
(option) fuse has blown. replace the fuse.
The display unit switch is Consult with JRC or an affiliate.
broken.
The LCD display does not The LCD display is broken. Consult with JRC or an affiliate.
display anything.
The display does not light
up.
The alarm sound. Is not The buzzer is broken. Consult with JRC or an affiliate.
generated
The alarm sound is turned off. Refer to 4.11.2 for setting the alarm
sound.
The click does not sound. The key press sound is Refer to 4.14.3 for setting the Click
turned off. sound.
There is no reception. The sensor connection cable Check the connection cable.
(from sensor) is cut.
The sensor is broken. Consult with JRC or an affiliate.
There is no reception. The polarity of the serial cable Check the polarity of the cable.
(from external devices) is incorrect.
The interface does not match. Check the interface.
An unsupported sentence has Check the entered commands and
been entered. version.
There is no transmission. Output settings have not Refer to 4.20.
(to external devices) been configured.
The configured channel is Refer to 4.20.
incorrect.
The DISP-DPU or connector Consult with JRC or an affiliate.
board is broken.

5-3
5.3.2 Repair Unit

Repair units and their models are shown below.

No Name Model Notes

1 DISP-DPU CMJ-551 NWZ-4740 Display Unit
2 LCD Unit CCN-392A NWZ-4740 Display Unit
3 Keyboard Unit CMD-953T NWZ-4740 Display Unit
4 Connector Board CMH-2292 NWZ-4740 Display Unit
5 Beacon Antenna CAW-1 For JLR-4341 Sensor
6 Beacon Controller CMA-920 For JLR-4341 Sensor

Fuse

No Name Model Notes

1 2A Fuse MF60NR 250V 2 NWZ-4740 Display Unit

If Beacon Controller or Sensor is replaced, then a Sensor shall be reset.

5.3.3 Regular Replacement Parts

Parts which should be regularly replaced are shown below.

Contact JRC or an affiliate to order.
Replace the radome and packing when replacing the lithium batteries.
Please refer to "4.3 Entering Serial No./Barcode No.” in Service Manual and enter the Serial No.
or Barcode No. , when replacing the lithium batteries.

No Name Model Life Notes

LCD Unit CCN-392A 40000 hours Approximately 5 years of
1 (Inside display continuous use
unit)
Reception is possible even
Lithium Battery Approximately without battery power.
2 CR2354-1VC
(Inside Sensor) 5 years (It will takes 30 to 60 seconds
longer to fix the position)
Opening the radome
Radome Kit decreases waterproofing
(JLR-4341 Sensor Battery effectiveness, so replace the
3 MPAE30534
Radome and replacement radome and packing as well
Packing) when performing battery
replacement.

5-4
 Section 6 Installation

Caution
Please consult with JRC or an affiliate to perform installation.
Installation by unauthorized personnel may result in malfunction.

6.1 GPS Sensor Installation

6.1.1 Selecting the Position for Installation

Caution
When connecting the cable attached to the equipment, do not bend it acutely, twist
it, or impart excessive force. Doing so sometimes causes cracks or damage to the
coating, resulting in fire or electrocution.

Do not install the sensor where there is excessive vibration.

Vibration may cause sensor failure.

Do not paint the sensor.

Doing so may result in reception problems.

Do not install the sensor where temperature exceeds 55 degrees Celsius and there
is covered with exhaust gas from funnel. Doing so may causes flood, resulting in
sensor failure.

The junction box rubber gaskets (25 f Gland side) fit  10mm – 20mm cables.

Install the sensor where there are no obstacles, in order to ensure that GPS signals
can be directly received from satellites without interference or reflection of signals
from surrounding objects.
Whenever possible, select a place with the following characteristics.

1. An open space, which allows uniform reception of satellite signals.

2. Far away from any high power transmission antennas.
3. Outside radar beams.
4. Away from the INMARSAT antenna by at least 5 meters and outside the
INMARSAT beam.
5. Away from the antenna of a VHF transmitter and a direction finder
by at least 3 meters.
6. Away from a Magnetic Compass by at least 1 meters.
7. 3 meter or more away from amateur radio antennas.
If it is difficult to find an ideal site, select a place temporarily and install the equipment.
Conduct a test to make sure that the proper performance can be obtained and then fix the
equipment in position. If it is installed at an improper place, reception accuracy may be
impaired.

6-1
6.1.2 Sensor Installation Procedure

The sensor base contains 1 inch-14UNS-2B screw holes. It can be attached to poles with cut
male screws, or off-the-shelf adapters.

(1) When performing attachment, always hold and turn the sensor base. Holding and turning the
radome may result in a large amount of force applied at the junction of the base and the
radome, resulting in damage to the sensor.
When performing attachment, do not use adhesive for screw or other adhesive for screw part.
Adhesive component may attack to the radome, resulting in cracks.
The diagram shows the JLR-4341, but these instructions apply equally to the JLR-4340 as
well.

Radome

screw
part
male screw
Joint
Base Off-the-shelf
adapter, etc
Do not apply force to the joint. Hold and turn the base.

(2) Secure the sensor cable in position with a clamp band as shown below to protect it against
damage due to vibration.

Cable

Off-the-shelf
adapter, etc
Clamp band

(3) When connecting an extension cable to the DGPS sensor, always seal with self-bonding
tape in order to waterproof the connector, and wrap this section with vinyl tape to protect it.

6-2
6.1.3 Installation of the Sensor on the Mast

Use a screw adapter (optional component or equivalent) to connect the sensor to the mast.
The diagram shows the JLR-4341, but these instructions apply equally to the JLR-4340 as well.

JLR-4341
DGPS Sensor

Fitting Belt
MPBP02520
Screw Adapter
MTV302007A

Clamp Band

Mast (26mm to 90mm supported)

1. Loosen the fitting belt screw 2. Coil the fitting belt around 3. Tighten the clamp screw with
with a screwdriver to remove the mast as shown below. the screwdriver.
the clamp.

Clamp

Flathead Screwdriver

How to Install the Sensor on the Mast

6-3
6.1.4 Installation of the Sensor to pass a cable through a pole

It is possible to pass a cable through a pole, when DGPS sensor attached to poles with cut male
screws. (1inch-14 UNS-2A). In this case, Cable guard rubber (attached article) used.

(1) The cable is installed as following figure.

Do not bend the cable acutely. Doing so may result in damage to the cable.

Do not bend it acutely Cable installation figure

(2) Cable guard rubber is set in DGPS sensor.

Cable guard rubber

Push all the way in
(attached article)

6-4
(3) When DGPS sensor attached to poles with cut male screws, round off the corners.

round off the corners

25mm

1inch-14UNS-2A

(4)When performing attachment, always hold and turn the sensor base. Holding and turning the
radome may result in a large amount of force applied at the junction of the base and the
radome, resulting in damage to the sensor.
When performing attachment, do not use adhesive for screw or other adhesive for screw part.
Adhesive component may attack to the radome, resulting in cracks.

Radome

screw
part
male screw
Joint
Base

Do not apply force to the joint. Hold and turn the base.

6-5
6.2 Display Unit Installation

6.2.1 Selecting the Position for Installation

Warning
Install this unit at least 1 m away from any magnetic compasses.
Installation near a magnetic compass may result in interference with the
magnetic compass, and may result in an accident.

Caution
Use the indicated screws when installing the display unit to a stable wooden
surface. Failure to do so may result in the display unit falling over, causing injury
or property damage.

Select an installation location that meets the following conditions.

6.2.2 Display Installation Procedure

Mount the unit as described below.

(1) Loosen the unit knob, and disconnect the mount from the unit.
(2) Use the included screws to secure the mount where desired.
(3) Return the unit to the mount, and tighten it with the knob.
370 or more 201 or more
190 or more

Knob Bolt Mount

R i dS

(Unit: mm)
Mount (Bottom)

6-6
6.2.3 How to Flush Mount the Display

 Flush Mount (Connection with standard included components)

Refer to the flush mount overview diagram to perform flush mount installation.
Refer to the diagrams shown below for mount hole and installation space details.

Leave space for maintenance after

installation

180 or more

(Unit: mm)

6-7
 Flush Mount (Connection with optional component)

Leave space for maintenance after

installation

180 or more

(Unit: mm)

6-8
6.3 Cable Connection

 Unit (Rear Connectors)

D-Sub Terminal
Used to connect to a computer (RS-232C) or printer.

CONTACT IN/OUT GPS/DGPS DATA IN/OUT ETHERNET

External Equipment Connection Terminal

(Ethernet)
Used for ECDIS connection, etc.

External Equipment Connection Terminal (Serial Transmission)

Used for radar equipment connection, etc.

Receiver Connection Terminal

GPS/DGPS receiver connection.

External Equipment Connection Terminal (Contact Signal)

Used for connection to external buzzers and optional
peripherals.

Chassis Earth Terminal

Used for connection to ship earth as needed.

Power Input Terminal

Used for power input to unit.
Always use the included power cable.

6-9
 [Power Supply Connector]

DC12/24V

Power Cable: CFQ-7257 (Included)

① ②

Terminal Name Explanation

Number
(CFQ-7252)
1 (Black) DCIN - Connect the included power cable.
DC12/24V
2 (Red) DCIN + The voltage shall be 10.8 - 31.2 V DC.

Connection Cable Appearance

Cable Length: 2m Red

+
CFQ-7257
Black
-

Fuse Holder
(Internal 2A fuse)

 Noise Filtering
Make a loop with the cable and clamp it with the included Clamp Filter as shown below.

Clamp Filter

6-10
 [GPS/DGPS Connector]

GPS/DGPS

① ⑤
⑥
② ④
③

Terminal Name Explanation

Number
(CFQ-9000/
CFQ-9002)
1 (Red) GPS/DGPS 13V Power to the sensor is supplied by the display
2 (Black) Power GND unit.
3 (White) B
RXD0 Receives data from the sensor.
4 (Green) A
5 (Yellow) TXD0 A Sends configuration data to the sensor.
6 (Brown) Unused

 Cable Extension
(1) For cable lengths of less than 15 m
Use the extension cable (CFQ-9000).

Extension Cable/CFQ-9000 (Max 15 m)

(2) For cable lengths of more than 15 m

Use the junction box (NQE-7700A).

Junction Box/NQE-7700A

DGPS Cable/CFQ-9002 TTYCYS-7 for connection between junction boxes (max 50 m)

6-11
 Coaxial Cable Kit Connection
When using a pre-existing coaxial cable, such as when switching from a JLR-6800, use a
coaxial cable kit (NQD-4414).

Coaxial Cable Kit/NQD-4414

DGPS Cable/CFQ-8919 Existing coaxial cable

6-12
[Data IN/OUT Connector]

DATA IN/OUT

Data Cable: CFQ-5374 (Option)

① ⑧
② ⑨ ⑦
⑪ ⑫
③ ⑩ ⑥
④ ⑤

Terminal Name Explanation

Number
(CFQ-5374)
1 (Brown) A Receives tide, water temperature, and water depth data, as
2 (Red) B well as alarm ACK. (Data IN4)
RXD4
(Refer to "4.20.7.8 Setting Tidal Current Meter Input" for
details regarding tidal current display configuration)
3 (Orange) A Performs output in accordance with "Data IN/OUT1"
4 (Yellow) TXD1 B configured specifications.
(Refer to "4.20.7.1 Configuring Data IN/OUT1" for details)
5 (Green) A Performs output in accordance with "Data OUT3"
6 (Blue) TXD3 B configured specifications.
(Refer to "4.20.7.3 Setting Data OUT3" for details)
7 (Purple) A Performs output in accordance with "Data OUT2"
8 (Grey) TXD2 B configured specifications.
(Refer to "4.20.7.2 Setting Data OUT2" for details)
9 (White) A Performs output in accordance with "Data OUT4"
10 (Black) TXD4 configured specifications.
B
(Refer to "4.20.7.4 Setting Data IN/OUT4" for details)
11 (Pink) GND ISO GND connection for serial transmission cable.
12 (Light Blue) GND Chassis earth

Connection Cable Appearance

CFQ-5374

3m

External Equipment

6-13
 Connector Assembly

(1) Prepare the cable to the following dimensions.

3mm

10mm

(2) Assemble the included components in the following order.

Sealing Nut Clamp Ring Lock Nut Housing

Seal Gasket O-Ring

Gasket installation
direction

Clamp Ring tightening torque: 1.2 - 1.5 kgf-cm

Sealing Nut tightening torque: 1.3 - 1.8 kgf-cm

6-14
[Contact Signal IN/OUT Connector]

CONTACT IN/OUT

Data Cable: CFQ-5404 (Option)

① ②
③ ④
⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨
⑩ ⑪ ⑫
⑬ ⑭

Terminal Number Name Explanation

(CFQ-5404)
1
2 Unused
3
4
5 Unused
6
7 (Purple) COM Outputs contact signal.
Contact
8 (Grey) NC (Refer to "4.20.7.5 Setting Contact Output 1" for
Output 1
9 (White) NO configuration details)
10 (Black) COM Outputs contact signal.
Contact
11 (Pink) NC (Refer to "4.20.7.6 Setting Contact Output 2" for
Output 2
12 (Light Blue) NO configuration details)
13 (Light Green) Contact ACKIN+ Inputs contact signal.
14 (Light Brown) Input ACKIN- (Performed by shorting both terminals)
NO: Normally Open NC: Normally Closed

Connection Cable Appearance

CFQ-5404

3m

Relay
External Equipment
COM
NO

NC

Contact Max DC30V/1.0A

6-15
 [Ethernet Connector]

ETHERNET

Cable: CFQ-5473 A(Option)

CFQ-5474 A(Option)

1 Pin 8 Pin

Terminal Number Name Explanation

(CFQ-5473)
1 (Orange/White) + Outputs data.
2 (Orange) TX - (Refer to "4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" for
configuration details)
3 (Green/White) + Inputs data.
RX (Refer to "4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" for
configuration details)
4 (Blue)
5 (Blue/White)
6 (Green) - Inputs data.
RX (Refer to "4.20.7.7 Setting LAN Settings" for
configuration details)
7 (Brown/White)
8 (Brown)

6-16
[RS232C Connector]
This port is a dedicated port for updates and printer connection.
Remove the two screws from the rear, remove the cover, and connect the cable.
Perform printer configuration via Data IN/OUT1.
Use a straight cable for updating, and a cross cable when connecting a printer.

Female (S-type)

Terminal
Name Explanation
Number
1 Unused
2 TXD Transmitted data
3 RXD Received data
4 Unused
5 GND ISO Signal ground
6 Unused
7 CTS Transmission possible
8 RTS Transmission request
9 Unused

RS232C Cable for updating

Straight Cable
① ①
② ② PC
Display ③ ③
④ ④
⑤ ⑤
⑥ ⑥
⑦ ⑦
⑧ ⑧
⑨ ⑨
D-Sub 9 Pin D-Sub 9 Pin
Male Female
* An all-pin cable can also be used.

6-17
6.4 Optional Peripheral Connection

6.4.1 Sub Display Connection

Connect the sub display sensor connection terminal to the main display external equipment
connection terminal (serial).
Use a junction box (CQD-10).

Any main display external equipment connection terminal can be used. The following
specifications apply to the terminal.
Data format: IEC
Bit rate: 4800 bps
Sentence Sub Display: "On"

To display satellite information on the sub display, change the bit rate to "9600 bps", and add
"GSV" and "CD, GP, 3" to the sentence setting.

Set the display type to "Sub" to use the unit as a sub-display.

Connect to receiver connection terminal

Connect to external equipment connection terminal

Junction Box/CQD-10

Sub Display Main Display

Data Cable/CFQ-5374

DGPS Cable/CFQ-9002

Caution: carries voltage

Wrap this section with vinyl tape to protect.

①
② ○
③ ○ TXDB
④ ○ TXDA
⑤ :
○ Main display
⑥ external equipment
connection terminal
Sub display sensor CQD-10
connection terminal terminal board

6-18
6.4.2 Junction Box Connection

Caution
The junction box rubber gaskets (25 f Gland side) fit 10mm – 20mm cables.

 How to Mount the Junction Box on a Flat Surface

Securely mount the junction box on a given flat surface using self-tapping screws and flat
washers as shown below.

NQE-7700A Junction Box

Tapping Screw (5mm)

Flat Washer

Memo
The self tapping screws and flat washers in the figure above are not included with
this equipment.

 How to Mount the Junction Box on the Mast

Securely mount the junction box on the mast using the pole mounting kit (option:
MPBP30608).

6-19
 Pole Mounting Kit
MPBP30608

Bracket SUS

Hex Bolt M6 X 60 SUS

Washer M6 SUS

Spring Washer M6 SUS

Nut M6 SUS

Lock Nut M6 SUS

Mast
(26mm - 53mm)
(Note) SUS: Stainless Steel

To DGPS Sensor

Gland 15 f

Perform waterproofing ① or ② below for

the glands.

①<Exterior>
Waterproof with self-adhesive tape,
and cover with protective vinyl tape.

②<Interior>
Cover cable entry point gaps
completely with sealant.

Gland 25 f

250V-MPYCYS-7

6-20
 Internal Connection
Connect the respective cables (cable from the DGPS sensor and extension cable) to the
terminals provided in the junction box as shown in the following figure.

DGPS Sensor Cable DGPS Sensor Junction Box

Line lengths:
555 mm Cable Terminal
Red 1
Black 2
White 3
Green 4
Yellow 5
Brown 6
Shield Line 3

JLR-4340
Terminal board GPS Sensor Junction Box
Line lengths: Cable Terminal
455 mm Red 1
Extension Cable
Black 2
White 3
Green 4
Yellow 5
Brown 6
Blue 3
Shield Line 3
Orange(not use)

6.4.3 Coaxial Cable Kit Connection

Please refer to the instructions included in the coaxial cable kit for details regarding coaxial cable
kit connection.

Coaxial Cable Kit/NQD-4414

DGPS Cable/CFQ-9002 Existing coaxial cable

6-21
6.4.4 Printer Connection

The RS-232C connector can be connected to the printer (DPU-414).

The RS-232C connector can be configured via Data IN/OUT1.Set the Data IN/OUT1 data format
to "Printer". The printer format data is output from RS-232C connector and also DATA IN/OUT
connector No.3,4-pin. Another equipment cannot be connected this pin.

Connect to RS-232C Connector

Printer/DPU-414

DC6.5V
Printer Cable
Power Supply 7ZCJD0254A (1.5 m) or
NBG-320 7ZCDJD0270B (9 m)

Please refer to "DPU-414 Operation Manual" and set the DIP switches on DPU-414.

DIP SW1
Switch No. Function Settings
ON/OFF
1 Input Method Serial OFF
2 Printing speed High ON
3 Auto loading ON ON
4 CR Function Carriage return OFF
5 DIP SW setting Command Enable ON
6 Print density 100% OFF
7 ON
8 ON

DIP SW2
Switch No. Function Settings
ON/OFF
1 Print mode Normal printing(40 columns) ON
2 User-defined characters buck-up ON ON
3 Character type Ordinary characters ON
4 Zero font ０ ON
5 International character set Japanese ON
6 ON
7 ON
8 ON

DIP SW3
Switch No. Function Setting
ON/OFF
1 Data bit length 8 bits ON
2 Parity permission Without ON
3 Parity condition Odd ON
4 Flow control H/W BUSY ON
5 Baud rate 4800bps ON
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF

6-22
6.4.5 Connecting Two Navigation Devices to a Printer

A switch (NCZ-777) is necessary when connecting 2 GPS units to printer (DPU-414).

RS-232C connectors and printer (DPU-414) can be connected.
The RS-232C connectors for both units are configured in Data IN/OUT1. The Data IN/OUT1 data
format should be set to "printer".
Use the printer connection kit (7ZXJD0076) to extend the printer power cable.

Connect to RS-232C connector

Printer/DPU-414
Switch NCZ-777

Printer cable (3 m)
7ZCNA4109

Printer connection kit

Power cable 7ZCJD0257B
and connection terminal
DPYC-1.5
MAX 8.5m Printer cable (10 m)
7ZCNA4112
DC6.5V
Power supply
NBG-320

Printer Cable (7ZCNA4109/7ZCNA4112) Pin

3 Red RXD
4 Black TXD
7 Green RTS (Not Use)
5 Blue GND

Cable Connector

Connection Example

1 Black TXD No1GPS 7ZCNA4112

2 Blue GND No1GPS 7ZCNA4112
3 Black TXD No2GPS 7ZCNA4112
4 Blue GND No2GPS 7ZCNA4112
5
6 GPS Navigator
7
8
9
7ZCNA4109 RXD Red 10
7ZCNA4109 GND Blue 11
12
Printer

NCZ-777 Terminal

6-23
6.4.6 Connecting 2 GPS Units to an Automatic GPS Select Switch

An automatic GPS select switch (NCZ-1537A) can be used to connect and automatically switch
between two GPS units. The No. 1 GPS unit normally outputs data, but when it is not performing
positioning, the No. 2 GPS unit is automatically switched over to.
To perform automatic switching, the two GPS units must be connected in a LAN, and the No. 2
GPS unit must output control signaling to the automatic GPS select switch.
Set the No. 1 GPS unit LAN setting mutual monitoring to "On".
Set the No. 2 GPS unit LAN setting mutual monitoring to "On", and set the control signal output
port data format to "SWITCH".
Set the Dip switch (S1) on NCZ-1537A to 1: ON and 2: ON.

No. 1 GPS Unit

No. 1 GPS
LAN Data
GPS select
Switch
Control Signal NCZ-1537A No. 1 or No. 2 GPS Data

No. 2 GPS
No. 2 GPS Unit Data

Connection Example
The following connection conditions apply to the connection example.
・GPS Data is output from TXD3 Port (DATA OUT3) of each GPS Unit.
・Control signal is output from TXD2 Port (DATA OUT2) of No2 GPS Unit.

Power 12/24V 24+

GND 24-
SL+
Sl-
No2GPS TXD2 Purple ( 7 ) DI+
Control Signal
No2GPS TXD2 Grey ( 8 ) DI-
No1GPS TXD3 Green ( 5 ) G1+ No1GPS Data
No1GPS TXD3 Blue ( 6 ) G1-
No2GPS TXD3 Green ( 5 ) G2+ No2GPS Data
No2GPS TXD3 Blue ( 6 ) G2-
GPS Data Output A GO+ GPS Data Output
GPS Data Output B GO-

NCZ-1537A Terminal

6-24
6.5 LAN and Serial Connection
This section contains representative examples of LAN and serial connections and settings.
Please refer to "5.19.7 Configuring Data I/O" for details regarding configuration.
The following connection conditions apply to the connection example.
・Two GPS units, 1 sub-display, and ECDIS are connected via LAN and are sharing routes
・The LAN is connected to remote maintenance
・Serial cabling is used to connect to the automatic GPS select switch and printer.
・The HUB of ECDIS is used.
Connection Example

ECDIS
No. 1 GPS Unit No. 2 GPS Unit Sub-display Remote
Maintenance

Data D-Sub LAN Data Data D-Sub LAN LAN LAN LAN
OUT3 OUT3 OUT2

LAN

Printer
Switch DPU-414
NCZ-777
External Equipment
Switch NCZ-1537A
Setting Examples
Setting Item No. 1 GPS Unit No. 2 GPS Unit Sub-Display
1. Display Type Main Main Sub
2. Sensor No. 1 2 1
3. LAN
ACTIVE Route Share4 Share4 Share4
DATA Route Share Share Share
Mutual On On On
Monitoring
Data OUT Connect Multicast Multicast Multicast

Format IEC IEC IEC

Sentence Sub-Display Sub-Display
ALR, ACK ALR, ACK ALR, ACK
Remote On On Off
Maintenance
4. Serial
Data IN/OUT1 Data Format Printer Printer Not yet
Bit Rate 4800 4800 determined
Data OUT2 Data Format Unused Switch
Data OUT3 Data Format IEC IEC
Bit Rate 4800 4800
Sentence User Selected User Selected
Data IN/OUT4 Unused Unused
If the "PRINTER" data format is selected, output will be in a printer-only dedicated format.
If the "SWITCH" data format is selected, automatic GPS select switch control signaling will be
output.
Selecting "SUB-Display" as the sentence will allow you to select the necessary sentence for the
sub-display.

6-25
6.6 Connection Diagram
Typical Connection Example

No.1 No.2
NNN-4341 NNN-4341 NMEA (IEC 61162-1/NMEA (RS422))
DGPS RECEIVER DGPS RECEIVER OUTPUT TB2 A *250V-TTYCS-1
1A A1 GMDSS CONSOLE
1B A2 B
Attached to JLR-4341 Attached to JLR-4341 FG A3
15m (Cut for B15m) 15m (Cut for B15m) NQA-4251A A *250V-TTYCS-1 No.1 RADAR
2A A4
OUTPUT 2B A5 B
POLE MOUNTING KIT POLE MOUNTING KIT BUFFER A *250V-TTYCS-1
MPBP30608 MPBP30608 3A A6 No.2 RADAR
3B A7 B
NQE-7700A NQE-7700A FG A8
A *250V-TTYCS-1
JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX 4A A9 AIS
4B A10 B
WHT

WHT
GRN

GRN
RED

BRN

RED

BRN
TB2
BLK

BLK
YEL

YEL
5A B1 A *250V-TTYCS-1 VDR
5B B2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
FG B3
6A B4 A *250V-TTYCS-1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 AUTO PILOT
6B B5 B
7A B6 A *250V-TTYCS-1
ECHO SOUNDER
7B B7 B
*250V-MPYCYS-7 *250V-MPYCYS-7 FG B8
8A B9 A *250V-TTYCS-1
(Max.50m) (Max.50m) SPEED LOG
8B B10 B
NMEA
NQE-7700A NQE-7700A TB1 INPUT TB1
JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX A A1 A 9A B1 A *250V-TTYCS-1
B B NAVTEX
A2 B 9B B2
A3 FG FG B3
A4 FG 10A B4 A *250V-TTYCS-1
NAV.WORK STATION
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 + A5 + DC 10B B5 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 - A6 - 9-40V 11A B6
A7 A7 11B B7
WHT

WHT
GRN

GRN
RED

BRN

RED

BRN
YEL

YEL
BLK

BLK

A8 A8 FG B8
A9 NC 12A B9
A10 NC 12B B10

GPS Connection Cable GPS Connection Cable *

CFQ-9002 5m CFQ-9002 5m
GPS/DGPS GPS/DGPS
NWZ-4740 NWZ-4740
*0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5

ETHERNET DISPLAY UNIT ETHERNET DISPLAY UNIT

DC DATA CONTACT DC DATA CONTACT
12/24V IN/OUT IN/OUT 12/24V IN/OUT IN/OUT *250V-TTYCS-1
LAN straight cable

LAN straight cable

DC Power cable

DC Power cable
CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5404 3m

CFQ-7257 2m

CFQ-5404 3m
CFQ-5374 3m

CFQ-5374 3m

CQD-10
Data cable

Data cable
Data cable

Data cable

NCZ-777
JUNCTION BOX SELECT SWITCH
15m

15m

TB01
GRN
1 A1 *250V-TTYCS-4 A1 1 RX
BLU
2 B1 B1 2
PRP
3 A A2 3 RX
GRY
4 B B2 4
PRP
5 + 5 RX
GRY
6 - 6
GRN
7 A2
*250V-TTYCS-1
*250V-TTYCS-1

7
BLU
ECDIS HUB ECDIS HUB 8 B2 8
PRP A A
*0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5

9 TD+ 9
GRY
10 B TD- 10 B
*250V-TTYCS-1

PRP +
11 - 11
GRY
12 12
*0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5
*250V-TTYCS-1

*
*
No.1
NBG-320 No.1 DGPS
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
AC220V *0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5 + No.2 DGPS ECDIS
0V DC OUT +
1 Ø 60Hz AC IN No.1 DGPS
100V 6.5V - CONNING
-
220V No.2 DGPS DISPLAY
*0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5 + RED No.1 DGPS
DC24V + IN DC OUT +
- BLK No.2 DGPS ALARM
(From GMDSS CONSOLE) - DC24V 12V -
+
-
*
No.2
NBG-320
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
AC220V *0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5 + DC OUT +
0V
1 Ø 60Hz 100V AC IN 6.5V -
-
220V NOTE
*0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5 + RED 1. * DOCK SUPPLY
DC24V + IN DC OUT +
(From GMDSS CONSOLE)
- - DC24V 12V -
BLK 2. JRC SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.3(T) x 25(W))
3. * DOCK SUPPLY (COPPER PLATE 0.5(T) x 30(W))
*

6-26
 Section 7 After-Sales Service
7.1 Warranty
● Specific periods may vary based on our warranty policies, but the standard warranty period
is one year from the date of purchase.

7.2 Repair parts stocking Period

● We keeps functional repair parts for this equipment (parts necessary for the functioning of
this equipment) in stock for 10 years from the discontinuation of production.

7.3 When Requesting Service

When you think the equipment is not operating properly, please read "5.3 Troubleshooting"
carefully, and inspect the equipment again. If the problem persists, stop using the equipment,
and consult your dealer, or a JRC branch or affiliate.

● Repairs during the warranty period

Should a malfunction or failure occur when the equipment is operated according to the
descriptions and instructions contained herein, it is repaired free of charge during the
warranty period by JRC or another location specified by your dealer. However, any repair
for failures resulting from misuse, negligence, or natural disasters, fire, or other Acts of God
is charged.

● Repairs after the warranty period

Repairs to restore the proper equipment operation can be made at a specified rate with the
user's consent. In this case, the equipment can either be sent to JRC or an affiliate, or
on-ship repairs can be performed at a location specified by JRC or a sales affiliate.
Repairs which cannot be performed on-board the ship needs to be performed in a repair
plant.

● Information that needs to be provided when requesting service

• Name, model, production date, and serial number
• Detailed description of the malfunction (alarm number, etc.)
• Name, address, and telephone number of your company or organization

7.4 Recommended Checks and Inspection

Equipment performance is subject to degradation due to age and change of component conditions
over time. In addition to your own routine check, additional inspection and maintenance is
recommended. Please consult with your dealer or one of our local offices. Note that this
inspection and maintenance is not free of charge.

If you have any other questions about after-sales service, please direct your inquiries to your
dealer or nearest local office.

A list of branches is provided at the end of the "Contact List".

7-1
7-2
 Section８ Disposal

WARNING
When disposing of the used lithium battery, place insulating tape over
the battery terminals, or otherwise insulate the battery. Failure to do so
may result in heating, explosion, or fire due to a shorted
battery.

8.1 Disposal of the Equipment

● Observe all rules and regulations of the local authorities when disposing of this equipment.

8.2 Disposal of Used Batteries

This equipment contains a lithium battery.

● When disposing of the used lithium battery, place insulating tape over the battery terminals,
or otherwise insulate the battery. Dispose of the battery properly as directed by the local
authorities. Consult your dealer, our sales office, or the local authorities for further details
on disposal methods.

8-1
8-2
 Section 9 Specification
9.1 NWZ-4740 DISPLAY UNIT

9.1.1 Basic

・Display Unit ：5.7 inch FSTN LCD 320×240 dots

・Backlight ：LCD and Key lighting
・Dimmer Levels ：Bright, Medium, dark, off
・Memories ：Waypoints 10000points maximum
Event/Mark 1000points maximum (include MOB)
Track 2000points maximum
Route 100routes maximum
・Route plan ：512 waypoints per one route
・Geodetic datum ：Selection among 47 geodetic datum
・Magnetic Variation ：Automatic or manual
・Navigation Calculation ：Grate circle or Rhumb line selectable
・Alarm ：Arrival, Anchor, Boundary, XTD, No position fix, Speed,
Trip, Temperature*, Depth*, HDOP
・Plot Function Scale ：0.2,0.5,1,2,5,10,20,50,100,200,300NM
Interval ：1～60min(1 sec) or 0.01～99.99NM(0.01NM) selectable
・Data Input/Output ：RS-422 4 output ports, 1 input port, 1 LAN port
・Contact ：2 output ports, 1 input port
・Selectable Unit ：Distance, Speed NM,kn or km,km/h or mi,mi/h selectable
height, Depth m or ft or fm selectable
Temperature ℃ or ℉ selectable
・Loran Conversion Function：Latitude and longitude can be converted into the Loran time
difference.
・Display Language ：Japanese or English
・Power Supply Voltage ：DC12/24V（+30%,-10%）
・Power Consumption ：less than 10W (JLR-7800)
less than 9W (JLR-7500)
less than 7W (NWZ-4740)
・Dimension ：267.4(W)×162(H)×85(D)mm
・Mass ：Approximately 2.3Kg

*: External sensor must be connected.

9.1.2 Environment

・Operating Temperature ：-15℃～+55℃

・Storage Temperature ：-25℃～+70℃
・Vibration ：IEC60945 ed.4 conformant
・EMC ：IEC60945 ed.4 conformant
・Waterproofing ：IP44

9-1
9.1.3 External Interface

(1)Serial Transmission
Channel Specification Notes
DATA RS-422 Output NMEA,IEC,JRC
IN/OUT1 RS-232C Input/Output - for PC or Printer

DATA OUT2 RS-422 Output NMEA,IEC,JRC

DATA OUT3 RS-422 Output NMEA,IEC,JRC
DATA RS-422 Input NMEA External Equipment
IN/OUT4 Output NMEA,IEC,JRC

(1-1)NMEA
・Specification ：NMEA0183
・Version ：Ver1.5,2.1,2.3
・Bit Rate ：4800,9600,19200,38400bps
・Data Bit ：8bit
・Parity Bit ：None
・Start Bit ：1bit
・Stop Bit ：1bit
・Output Sentence ：GGA,RMC,GLL,VTG,GSA,GSV,DTM,GBS,GRS,GST,ZDA,GNS,
MSS**,ALR,VDR*,VHW*,APB,BOD,BWC,BWR,RMB,XTE,ZTG,
AAM,ALR,RTE,WPL,ACK,
HDT*,THS*,DBT*,DPT*,MTW*,CUR*,VBW*
・Output Interval ：1s,2s,3s,4s,5s,6s,7s,8s,9s,OFF
・Input Sentence ：HDT,THS,DBT,DPT,MTW,CUR,VBW,VHW,ACK,WPL,RTE,ALR

**Function only available on JLR-7800

*External sensor must be connected

1）Some combinations of output sentence, bit rates, and output intervals may not be possible.

(1-2)IEC
・Specification ：IEC61162

(1-3)JRC
・Specification ：JRC
・Bit Rate ：1200bps
・Data Bit ：8bit
・Parity Bit ：None
・Start Bit ：1bit
・Stop Bit ：2bit

(2)Contact Signal
Channel I/O Notes
CONTACT Output Alarm,200p/NM,400p/NM,ACK
OUT1
CONTACT Output Alarm,200p/NM,400p/NM,ACK
OUT2
CONTACT 3 Input ACK

(3)LAN
・Specification ：JRC
・Bit Rate ：10/100Mbps
・Common Route ：JRC
・Data output ：NMEA,IEC

9-2
9.2 JLR-4341 DGPS Sensor

9.2.1 Basic

(1)GPS Unit
・Reception Method ：Multi channel 12ch + SBAS 1ch
・Reception Frequency ：1575.42MHz±1MHz（C/A code）
・Maximum Number of
Tracked Satellites ：12 satellites
・Accuracy ：13m 2DRMS （HDOP≦4 SA off）
5m 2DRMS （Beacon selected）
7m 2DRMS （SBAS selected）
・SBAS ：WAAS、MSAS、EGNOS
・Geodetic datum ：Selection among 46 geodetic datum

(2)Beacon Unit
・Reception Frequency ：283.5～325kHz
・Selection of
Beacon Station ：Automatic or manual

(3)Power Supply
・Power Supply Voltage ：DC12/24V（+30%,-10%）
・Power Consumption ：less than 2.5W

(4)Dimensions and Mass

・Dimensions ：φ134mm×H155mm
・Mass ：Approximately 1.7kg (Include Cable)

9.2.2 Environment

・Operating Temperature ：-25℃～+55℃

・Storage Temperature ：-40℃～+70℃
・Vibration ：IEC60945 ed.4 conformant
・EMC ：IEC60945 ed.4 conformant
・Waterproofing ：IP56

9-3
9.3 JLR-4340 GPS Sensor

9.3.1 Basic

(1)GPS Unit
・Reception Method ：Multi channel 12ch + SBAS 1ch
・Reception Frequency ：1575.42MHz±1MHz（C/A code）
・Maximum Number of
Tracked Satellites ：12 satellites
・Accuracy ：13m 2DRMS （HDOP≦4 SA off）
7m 2DRMS （SBAS selected）
・SBAS ：WAAS、MSAS、EGNOS
・Geodetic datum ：Selection among 46 geodetic datum

(2)Power Supply
・Power Supply Voltage ：DC12/24V（+30%,-10%）
・Power Consumption ：less than 1.5W

(3)Dimension and Mass

・Dimensions ：φ108mm×H108mm
・Mass ：Approximately 0.7Kg (Include Cable)

9.3.2 Environment

・Operating Temperature ：-25℃～+55℃

・Storage Temperature ：-40℃～+70℃
・Vibration ：IEC60945 ed.4 conformant
・EMC ：IEC60945 ed.4 conformant
・Waterproofing ：IP56

9-4
 Appendix
Appendix1 List of Geodetic System
Screen
Setting Geodetic System
Display
W84 WGS-84 0 WGS-84
W72 WGS-72 1 WGS-72
TOY JAPAN 2 Tokyo Datum
NAD27
NAS 3 North American 1927 (USA)
USA
NAD27
NAS 4 North American 1927 (Canada, Alaska)
CAN
EUROPE
EUR 5 Europe 1950 (Europe)
50
AUA AUSTRA 66 6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)
OGB OSGB-36 7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)
008 NAD-83 8 NAD-83
ADI ADI 11 Adindan (Ethiopia, Sudan)
ARF ARF 12 ARC 1950 (Botswana)
AUG AUG 13 Australian Geodetic 1984 (Australia)
BER BER 14 Bermuda 1957 (Bermuda islands)
BOO BOO 15 Bogota Observatory (Columbia)
CAI CAI 16 Compo Inchauspe (Argentine)
CHI CHI 17 Chatham 1971 (Chatham Islands)
CHU CHU 18 Chua Astro (Paraguay)
COA COA 19 Corrego Alegre (Brazil)
BAT BAT 20 Djakarta (Vatavia) (Sumatra)
EUR EUR 21 European 1979 (Europe)
GEO GEO 22 Geodetic Datum 1949 (New Zealand)
GUA GUA 23 Guam 1963 (Guam)
024 024 24 Hayford 1910 (Finland)
HJO HJO 25 Hjorsey 1955 (Iceland)
IND IND 26 Indian (India, Napal)
IRL IRL 27 Ireland 1965 (Ireland)
KEA KEA 28 Kertau 1948 (West Malaysia, Singapore)
LCF LCF 29 L.C.5 Astro (Cayman Brac island)
LIB LIB 30 Liberia 1964 (Liberia)
LUZ LUZ 31 Luzon (Philippines)
MER MER 32 Merchich (Morocco)
MIN MIN 33 Minna (Cameroon)
NAH NAH 34 Nahrwan (Oman)
NAP NAP 35 Naparima, BWI (Trinidad and Tobago)
OEG OEG 36 Old Egyptian (Egypt)
OHA OHA 37 Old Hawaiian (Hawaiian Islands )
PLN PLN 38 Pico de las Nieves (Canary Islands)
PRP PRP 39 Provisional south American 1956 (South America)
HIT HIT 40 Provisional south Chilean 1963 (South Chile)
PUR PUR 41 Puerto Rico (Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands)
QUO QUO 42 Qornoq (South Greenland)
043 043 43 RT90 (Sweden)
SAO SAO 44 Santa Braz (San Miguel, Santa Maria islands)
SAN SAN 45 South American 1969 (South America)
Southwest Base (Faial, Gracinao, Pico, San Jorge, Terceira
046 046 46
islands)
TIL TIL 47 Timbalai 1948 (Brunei, Malaysia)
SPK SPK 48 SK-42 (Pulkovo 42)

Appendix-1
Appendix2 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations
Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Acknowledge ACK Change CHG
Acquire, Acquisition ACQ Circularly Polarised CP
Acquisition Zone AZ Clear CLR
Adjust, Adjustment ADJ Closest Point of Approach CPA
Aft AFT Compact Disk Read Only CDROM
Memory
Alarm ALARM
Consistent Common CCRP
Altitude ALT Reference Point
Amplitude Modulation AM Consistent Common CCRS
Anchor Watch ANCH Reference System
Antenna ANT Contrast CONT
Anti Clutter Rain RAIN Coordinated Universal Time UTC
Anti Clutter Sea SEA Correction CORR
April APR Course CRS
Audible AUD Course Over the Ground COG
August AUG Course Through the Water CTW
Automatic AUTO Course To Steer CTS
Automatic Frequency Control AFC Course Up C UP
Automatic Gain Control AGC Cross Track Distance XTD
Automatic Identification AIS Cursor CURS
System
Dangerous Goods DG
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid ARPA
Date DATE
Autopilot AP
Day DAY
Auxiliary System/Function AUX
Dead Reckoning, Dead DR
Available AVAIL Reckoned Position
Azimuth Indicator AZI December DEC
Background BKGND Decrease DECR
Bearing BRG Delay DELAY
Bearing Waypoint To BWW Delete DEL
Waypoint Departure DEP
Bow Crossing Range BCR Depth DPTH
Bow Crossing Time BCT Destination DEST
Brilliance BRILL Deviation DEV
Built in Test Equipment BITE Differential GLONASS DGLONASS
Calibrate CAL Differential GNSS DGNSS
Cancel CNCL Differential GPS DGPS
Carried (for example, carried C Digital Selective Calling DSC
EBL origin)
Display DISP
Central Processing Unit CPU
Distance DIST
Centre CENT

Appendix-2
 Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Distance Root Mean Square DRMS Geometric Dilution Of GDOP
Precision
Distance To Go DTG
Global Maritime Distress and GMDSS
Drift DRIFT Safety System
Dropped D Global Navigation Satellite GNSS
(for example, dropped EBL System
origin)
Global Orbiting Navigation GLONASS
East E
Satellite System
Echo Reference REF
Global Positioning System GPS
Electronic Bearing Line EBL
Great Circle GC
Electronic Chart Display and ECDIS
Grid GRID
Information System
Ground GND
Electronic Chart System ECS
Grounding Avoidance GAS
Electronic Navigational Chart ENC System
Electronic Position Fixing EPFS Group Repetition Interval GRI
System
Guard Zone GZ
Electronic Range and ERBL
Bearing Line Gyro GYRO
Emergency Position EPIRB Harmful Substances HS
Indicating Radio Beacon (applies to AIS)
Enhance ENH Head Up H UP
Enter ENT Heading HDG
Equipment EQUIP Heading Control System HCS
Error ERR Heading Line HL
Estimated Position EP High Frequency HF
Estimated Time of Arrival ETA High Speed Craft HSC
Estimated Time of Departure ETD Horizontal Dilution Of HDOP
Precision
European Geo-Stationary EGNOS
Navigational Overlay System I - Band I-Band
Event EVENT Identification ID
Exclusion Zone EZ In IN
External EXT Increase INCR
F - Band (applies to Radar) F-Band Indication IND
February FEB Information INFO
Foreword FWD Infrared INF RED
Fishing Vessel FISH Initialisation INIT
Fix FIX Input INP
Forward FWD Input/Output I/O
Frequency FREQ Integrated Bridge System IBS
Frequency Modulation FM Integrated Navigation INS
System
Full FULL
Integrated Radio IRCS
Gain GAIN Communication System
Geographics GEOG Interference Rejection IR

Appendix-3
 Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Interswitch ISW Night NT
Interval INT Normal NORM
January JAN North N
July JUL North Up N UP
June JUN Not Less Than NLT
Label LBL Not More Than NMT
Latitude LAT Not Under Command NUC
Latitude/Longitude L/L November NOV
Leeway LWY October OCT
Limit LIM Off OFF
Line Of Position LOP Officer On Watch OOW
Log LOG Offset OFFSET
Long Pulse LP On ON
Long Range LR Out/Output OUT
Longitude LON Own Ship OS
Loran LORAN Panel Illumination PANEL
Lost Target LOST TGT Parallel Index Line PI
Low Frequency LF Past Positions PAST POSN
Magnetic MAG Passenger Vessel PASSV
Man Overboard MOB Performance Monitor MON
Manoeuvre MVR Permanent PERM
Manual MAN Person Overboard POB
Map(s) MAP Personal Identification PIN
Number
March MAR
Pilot Vessel PILOT
Maritime Mobile Services MMSI
Identity number Port/Portside PORT
Maritime Pollutant (applies to MP Position POSN
AIS)
Positional Dilution Of PDOP
Maritime Safety Information MSI Precision
Marker MKR Power PWR
Master MSTR Predicted PRED
Maximum MAX Predicted Area of Danger PAD
May MAY Predicted Point of Collision PPC
Medium Frequency MF Pulse Length PL
Medium Pulse MP Pulse Modulation PM
Menu MENU Pulse Repetition Frequency PRF
Minimum MIN Pulse Repetition Rate PRR
Missing MISSING Pulses Per Revolution PPR
Mute MUTE Racon RACON
Navigation NAV Radar RADAR

Appendix-4
 Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Radar Plotting RP Speed SPD
Radius RAD Speed and Distance SDME
Measuring Equipment
Rain RAIN
Speed Over the Ground SOG
Range RNG
Speed Through the Water STW
Range Rings RR
Stabilized STAB
Raster Chart Display System RCDS
Standby STBY
Raster Navigational Chart RNC
Starboard/Starboard Side STBD
Rate Of Turn ROT
Station STN
Real-time Kinemetic RTK
Symbol(s) SYM
Receive Rx RX
Synchronised/Synchronous SYNC
Receiver RCDR
Target TGT
Receiver Autonomous RAIM
Integrity Monitoring Target Tracking TT
Reference REF Test TEST
Relative REL Time TIME
Relative Motion RM Time Difference TD
Revolutions per Minute RPM Time Dilution Of Precision TDOP
Rhumb Line RL Time Of Arrival TOA
Roll On/Roll Off Vessel RoRo Time Of Departure TOD
Root Mean Square RMS Time to CPA TCPA
Route ROUTE Time To Go TTG
Safety Contour SF CNT Time to Wheel Over Line TWOL
Sailing Vessel SAIL Track TRK
Satellite SAT Track Control System TCS
S-Band S-BAND Tracking TRKG
Scan to Scan SC/SC Trail(s) TRAIL
Search And Rescue SAR Transmit and Receive TXRX
Search And Rescue SART Transceiver TCVR
Transponder
Transferred Line Of Position TPL
Search And Rescue Vessel SARV
Transmit TX
Select SEL
Transmitter TMTR )
September SEP
Transmitting Heading Device THD
Sequence SEQ
Transponder TPR
Set (i.e., set and drift, or SET
Trial TRIAL
setting a value)
Trigger Pulse TRIG
Ship’s Time TIME
True T
Short Pulse SP
True Motion TM
Signal to Noise Ratio SNR
Tune TUNE
Simulation SIM
Ultrahigh Frequency UHF
Slave SLAVE
South S Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS

Appendix-5
 Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Universal Time, Coordinated UTC Vessel Underway Using UWE
Engine
Universal Transverse UTM
Mercator Video VID
Unstabilised UNSTAB Visual Display Unit VDU
Variable Range Marker VRM Voyage VOY
Variation VAR Voyage Data Recorder VDR
Vector VECT Warning WARNING
Very High Frequency VHF Water WAT
Very Low Frequency VLF Waypoint WPT
Vessel Aground GRND Waypoint Closure Velocity WCV
Vessel at Anchor ANCH West W
Vessel Constrained by VCD Wheel Over Line WOL
Draught
Wheel Over Point WOP
Vessel Engaged in Diving DIVE
Operations Wheel Over Time WOT

Vessel Engaged in Dredging DRG World Geodetic System WGS

or Underwater Operations X-Band X-BAND
Vessel Engaged in Towing TOW
Operations
Vessel Not Under Command NUC
Vessel Restricted in RIM
Manoeuvrability)
Vessel Traffic Service VTS

Appendix-6
Appendix3 Default Settings
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Default
1.DISPLAY 1.CONTRAST 7
2.DIMMER 9
-MAXIMUM-
3 -TYPICAL- 6
4. -MINIMUM- 4
5.CLICK SOUND ON
6.REVERSING NORMAL
MODE
7.INPUT ASSIST OFF
8.DISPLAY SELECT 1.NAV START
2.PLOT 1 ON
3.PLOT 2 ON
4.PLOT 3 ON
5. CDI ON
6. GPS INFO ON
7.WPT INFO ON
8.BEACON INFO ON
9.NAV ASSIST ON
2.PLOT 1.WPT ○ (small size)
2.MARK ● (small size)
3.EVENT (small size)
4.TRACK PERIOD TIME 0min10sec
5.TRACK ・
6.LINE ―
7. EVENT/MARKLIST
8.DELETE EVENT/ 1.DELETE
MARK/TRACK EVENT/MARK LIST
2.DELETE ALL EVENT
3.DELETE ALL MARK
4.DELETE ALL
EVENT/MARK
5.DELETE TRACK
8.VISIBLE/INVISIBLE 1.WPT ON
2.WPT No. ON
3.MARK ON
4.EVENT ON
5.EVENT/MARK No. ON
6.TRACK ON
7.LINE ON
8.ARRIVAL CIRCLE LEG
9.XTD LEG
0.NEXT PAGE
1.SCALE BAR ON
2.SYMBOL INFO ON
3.CURSOR INFO ON
4.GRID LINE ON
5.GRID LAT ON
6.GRID LON ON
0.PREVIOUS PAGE
0.NEXT PAGE
1.CURSOR LARGE
2.OWN CIRCLE OFF
3.OWN VECTOR OFF
0.PREVIOUS PAGE
3.WPT/ROUTE 1.ENTRY WPT/
WPT LIST
2.MAKE ROUTE/
ROUTE LIST

Appendix-7
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Default
3.ROUTE 1.LEG CHANGE
START/END 2.DIRECTION
3.NAVIGATION
4.COPY WPT/ROUTE 1.WPT COPY
2.ROUTE COPY
5.DELETE 1.WPT DEL
WPT/ROUTE 2.ROUTE DEL
6. TRANSFER 1.OUT / IN OUT
WPT/ROUTE (LAN) 2.CONNECT / MULTICAST
FROM IP
3.TO IP 0.0.0.0(at shipment)
4.PORT No. 0(at shipment)
5.FORMAT SHARE ROUTE
6.OUT TYPE ROUTE+WPT
0.START
7.DEFAULT 1.WIDTH PORT 1.00NM
SETTINGS 2.WIDTH STBD 1.00NM
3.ARRIVAL RAD 1.00NM
4.SPEED 10.00kn
5.SAIL GC/RL RL
6.SOG SMOOTHING OFF
4.ALARM 1.ARRIVAL/ANCHOR ARV
2.XTD/BOUNDARY XTD
3. DGPS ON→OFF
4. HDOP 4
5.TEMP OFF
6.DPTH OFF
7.TRIP OFF
8.SPD OFF
0.ALARM SOUND 1.SYSTEM 2
SET 2.ARRIVAL/ANCHOR 1
3.XTD/BOUNDARY 1
4. DGPS 6
5. HDOP 2
6.TEMP 3
7.DPTH 3
8.TRIP 3
9.SPEED 3

Appendix-8
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Default
5.SYSTEM 1.TIME DIFF +00:00
2.DATE DISP DD MM,'YY
3.TIME DISP 24hr
4.DATUM WGS84
5.UNIT - NM,kn
DIST/SPEED
6. HEIGHT, DEPTH m
7. TEMPERATURE ℃
8.MAG CORR OFF
9.SPEED METER 50kn
6. GPS/BEACON/ 1.GPS MODE AUTO
SBAS 2.FIX MODE AUTO
3.SAT ELV MASK 5 Degrees
4. HDOP 10
5.SMOOTHING 10 sec
POSITION
SPEED 10 sec
COURSE 10 sec
6. RAIM ACCURACY 100m
LEVEL
7. GPS 1.LATITUDE 35°00.00’N
INITIALIZATION 2.LONGITUDE 139°00.00’E
3.ANT HEIGHT +10m
4.DATE Fixing Value / -(No Fix)
5.TIME Fixing Value /-(No Fix)
0.SET
8.BEACON/SBAS 1.STATION SELECT AUTO
2.FREQUENCY 321.0KHz(MANUAL)
3.BIT RATE 200bps(MANUAL)
4. BEACON ON
INFORMATION
6.SBAS SEARCH AUTO
7. TYPE0 OFF
INFORMATION
8.RANGING OFF
9.LORAN 1.LORAN A/C OFF
LORAN A
1.LORAN A/C LOLAN A
2.STN SELECT STN 1 2S0
3. STN 2 2S2
4. TD CORR TD1 +0.0μs
5. TD2 +0.0μs
LORAN C
1.LORAN A/C LOLAN C
2. GRI CHAIN 8930
3. TD DATA TD1 11
4. DATA TD2 30
5. TD CORR TD1 +0.0μs
6. TD2 +0.0μs
7.VERSION
8.LANGUAGE 1.LANGUAGE ENGLISH

Appendix-9
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Default
0.EQUIP SET 1.DISPLAY TYPE MAIN
2.SENSOR No. 1(At shipment)
3. CCRP 1.SHIP DISABLE(At shipment)
2.BEAM 1.0m（At shipment）
3.LENGTH 1.0m（At shipment）
4.SENSOR DISABLE(At shipment)
5.X 0.0m（At shipment）
6.Y 0.0m（At shipment）
7.CCRP DISABLE(At shipment)
8.X 0.0m（At shipment）
9.Y 0.0m（At shipment）
4.CHECK OFF
5.RESET OFF
6.DEMO 1.DEMO TYPE OFF
2.DATE
3.TIME
4.LATITUDE
5.LONGITUDE
6.SPEED
7.COURSE
8.RADIUS
9.ROUTE
0.START
7.DATA I/O 1.DATA IN/OUT1 NMEA(default) 1.VERSION:
Ver2.3
2.BIT RATE:
4800bps
3.SENTENCE:
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
JRC
IEC 1.BITRATE
4800bps
2.SENTENCE
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
ROUTE 1.DATA IN/OUT:
OUT
2.BIT RATE:
4800bps
3.FORMAT:
NMEA Ver2.3
4.OUT TYPE:
ROUTE+WPT
PRINTER 1.BITRATE:
4800bps
2.INTERVAL:
OFF
SWITCH
2.DATA OUT2 NMEA (default) 1.VERSION:
Ver2.3
2.BIT RATE:
4800bps
3.SENTENCE:
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
Appendix-10
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Default
JRC
IEC 1.BITRATE
4800bps
2.SENTENCE
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
ROUTE 1.BIT RATE:
4800bps
2.FORMAT:
NMEA Ver2.3
3.OUT TYPE:
ROUTE+WPT
SWITCH
3.DATA OUT3 NMEA(default) 1.VERSION:
Ver2.3
2.BIT RATE:
4800bps
3.SENTENCE:
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
JRC
IEC 1.BITRATE
4800bps
2.SENTENCE
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
ROUTE 1.BIT RATE:
4800bps
2.FORMAT:
NMEA Ver2.3
3.OUT TYPE:
ROUTE+WPT
SWITCH
4.DATA IN/OUT4 NMEA(default) 1.VERSION:
Ver2.3
2.BIT RATE:
4800bps
3.SENTENCE:
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
JRC
IEC 1.BITRATE
4800bps
2.SENTENCE
GGA RMC VTG
DTM ZDA APB
RMB ACK
(all interval 1s)
ROUTE 1.DATA IN/OUT:
OUT
2.BIT RATE:
4800bps
3.FORMAT:
NMEA Ver2.3
4.OUT TYPE:
ROUTE+WPT
SWITCH

Appendix-11
Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu Default
EXT EQUIP 1.CURRENT
LAYER-A
LAYER:001
DATA No:ALL
LAYER-B
LAYER:002
DATA No:ALL
LAYER-C
LAYER:003
DATA No:ALL
5.CONTACT OUTPUT SYSTEM
1
6.CONTACT OUTPUT ALARM ACK
2
7. LAN ACTIVE ROUTE 1.CONNECT
OFF MULTICAST
DATA ROUTE:
SHARE
MUTUAL:OFF 1.CONNECT
MULTICAST
DATA OUT : 1.CONNTECT:
NMEA Ver2.3 MULTICAST
2.TO IP:
0.0.0.0
(at shipment)
3.PORT NO:
0(at shipment)
4.FORMAT:
NMEA Ver2.3
5.SENTENCE:
OFF
REMOTE 1.CONNTECT:
MAINTE: UNICAST
OFF 2.TO IP:
192.168.60.3
(at unicast)
3.PORT NO:
6001(at unicast)
4.INTERVAL:
1s
8.SOFT UPDATE 1.UPDATE AREA DISPLAY

2.BIT RATE SENSOR

AUTO
DISPLAY
115200bps
3.UPDATE STANDBY
9. IP 1. IP ADDR MAIN SENSOR No.1 192.168.60.163
MAIN SENSOR No.2 192.168.60.164
MAIN SENSOR No.3 192.168.60.165
SUB SENSOR No.1 192.168.60.166
SUB SENSOR No.2 192.168.60.167
SUB SENSOR No.3 192.168.60.168
2.SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0
3.DEFAYLT GATWAY 192.168.1.1

Appendix-12
 有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements）

形式名(Type): JLR-7800/7500 名称(Name): GPS Navigator

有毒有害物质或元素
部件名称 (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name) 铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)

GPS接收器
(Antenna)
× ○ × × × ×

船内装置(Inboard Unit)
・显示装置(Display Unit)
・信号处理装置
× ○ × × × ×
(Processing Unit)

外部设备(Peripherals)
・选择(Options)
・电线类(Cables)
× ○ × × × ×
・手册(Documennts)

○：表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
×：表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。
　　　(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
　　　 the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
 JLR-7500/7800
JLR-7500/7 800
NWZ-4
NWZ -4740
740
GPS NAVIGATOR

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPNA4137 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JUL. 2012 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan
 NKG-94
PRINTER

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
 PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the NKG-94 JRC Printer.
The JRC Printer can receive and prints out data from a GPS navigator.

● Before using the printer, carefully read this INSTRUCTION MANUAL so as to fully
understand the proper usage and handling.

● If you are uncertain about any operations of the printer or encounter any problems during
operation, refer to this manual. You will find solutions to common problems and useful hints
and suggestions.

i
 Before Operation

Alert Symbols
A number of alert symbols are used in this manual and labeled on the product itself to ensure
safe and proper usage, and to prevent possible injury to you or others and to avoid possible
property damage during operation or maintenance. Some of these alert symbols and their
meanings are shown below. Please understand them before reading this manual:

WARNING Indicates a situation that could result in death or

serious personal injury if ignored or if the product is
mishandled.

CAUTION Indicates a situation that could result in personal injury

and/or property damage if ignored or if the product is
mishandled.

Examples of alert symbols

The triangular symbol (△) means“caution”(danger and/or other warning).

The specific type of hazard (not specified in this example) is depicted in the
warning box.℉

This symbol signifies an action that is prohibited. The specific type of

prohibited action (in this example, disassembly) is depicted in or near the
symbol.

●This symbol signifies a required action. The specific type of required action
(in this example, removing the power plug from the outlet) is depicted in the
symbol.

ii
 Operating Precautions

WARNING

Do not disassemble or customize this equipment.

Fire, electrical shock, and/or malfunction can be caused.

Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment.
Electrical shock, and/or malfunction can be caused.

Do not use voltage other than that specified.

Fire, electrical shock, and/or malfunction can be caused.

Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits.

Inspection or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may
result in fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. If internal inspection or repair is
necessary, contact our service center or agents.

iii
 Operating Precautions

CAUTION
Do not use this equipment anyplace other than specified clause 8.2.
It may cause injury, failure or malfunction.

Do not install the equipment in a place near water, oil, or the medicine, etc.
which might splash.
It may cause injury, failure or malfunction.

Do not use this equipment anyplace other than specified clause 8.2.
It may cause injury, failure or malfunction.

Do not install the equipment in a place of terrific vibration or shock condition.

It may cause injury, failure or malfunction if it falls.

Do not place heavy objects on the printer.

It may cause injury, failure or malfunction.

Do not install this equipment other than our service center or agents.
It may cause failure or malfunction.

Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, heat, extremely high or low temperature,

corrosive gas, moisture, dust or terrific vibration. It may cause fire,
malfunction, and/or deterioration of print-out quality.

Always use the JRC- designated printer paper (7ZPJD0384). The use of any other
paper may cause printer trouble and/or deterioration of print-out quality.

Do not wire the cable bended with acute angle, twist ,stress, etc.
It may cause fire, injury or electrical shock with the cable crack or the cable
sheath inside damage.

The thermal head of the printer may be very hot after printing. Do not touch the
thermal head of the printer. Make sure the thermal head is cool before replacing
the paper or so.

When cleaning, do not use benzene, alcohol, thinner, or other volatile

solvents. The coated surface may deteriorate or be damaged. Wipe the
surface lightly with a soft cloth.

Use only MF51NR 250V 3.15 fuses. The use of other fuse may cause fire
and/or damage.

iv
 Operating Precautions

CAUTION
Do not place heavy objects on the printer. Failure to observe this warning may
result in the unit becoming unbalanced and thus causing injury if it falls.

Do not put a heavy thing on the power and data cables. Fire, electrical shock,
and failure may be caused.

Do not get inside of this printer wet.

It may cause failure, malfunction, and/or deterioration of print-out quality.

If an unusual smell, smoke, or other abnormality is detected, immediately turn

off the power to the printer and then turn off the power on the power distribution
panel of the vessel. After confirming that the unusual smell, smoke, or other
abnormality has cleared up, consult your dealer or nearest JRC service/sales
representative for repair. Using the receiver in such situation may cause fire
and/or electrical shock.

Be careful not to cut your hand with the paper cutter of the printer, and then
replace the printer paper. Injury may be cause.

The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off, when removing
the maintenance cover. Failure to observe this warning may cause electrical
shock and/or malfunction.

When installing, fix the bracket steadily on a hard wood-board with the
JRC-designated screws. If not, it may fall and result in personal injury and/or
damage or of the printer or other things.

When installing on the overhead or wall, it secure tolerable intensity of the weight,
the force of maintaining check and replacing the printer paper. If not, it may fall and
result in personal injury and/or damage or of the printer or other things.

The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off during replacing
a fuse. When replacing a fuse, use extreme caution not to bring it into contact
with adjacent ones. Short-circuiting due to making contact may cause power
and/or circuit board damage.

The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off, when removing
the front panel. Failure to observe this warning may cause electrical shock
and/or malfunction.

The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off, when replacing
the printer unit. Failure to observe this warning may cause electrical shock
and/or malfunction.

v
 EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
●NKG-94 Printer

Body
Bracket

(Unit: mm)
単位：mm

vi
 Contents
PREFACE............................................................................................................ i
Before Operation .............................................................................................. ii
Operating Precautions .................................................................................... iii
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ........................................................................... vi

1. Equipment Overview.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Functions.............................................................................................1-1
1.2 Features...............................................................................................1-1
1.3 Configuration ......................................................................................1-2
1.4 Structure ..............................................................................................1-3
1.5 Schematic Diagram.............................................................................1-4

2. Names and Functions of Components....................................................2-1

2.1 Front Panel ..........................................................................................2-1

3. Printer Operations.....................................................................................3-1
3.1 Turning Power On ...............................................................................3-1
3.2 Turning Power Off...............................................................................3-1
3.3 Loading Printer Paper ........................................................................3-2
3.4 Feeding the Printer Paper ..................................................................3-3
3.5 Printing ................................................................................................3-3
3.5.1 Printing periodically .................................................................................... 3-3
3.5.2 Printing at arbitrary time ............................................................................. 3-3
3.5.3 Printing example .......................................................................................... 3-4
3.5.4 Printing items and data in use .................................................................... 3-4
3.6 Printing Test ........................................................................................3-5

4. Maintenance and Inspection ....................................................................4-1

4.1 General Maintenance and Check Items ............................................4-1
4.2 Fuse Replacement ..............................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Removing maintenance cover (for preparation work) .............................. 4-2
4.2.2 Replacing fuses ........................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Printer Unit Replacing Procedure......................................................4-4
4.3.1 Removing front panel unit (for preparation work)..................................... 4-4
4.3.2 Replacing printer unit.................................................................................. 4-5
4.4 Maintenance Parts ..............................................................................4-6
4.5 Trouble Shooting ................................................................................4-6

5. Installation .................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Installation Procedure ........................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Desk mounting type installation procedure .............................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Flush mounting type installation procedure ............................................. 5-2
5.2 Rear Panel ...........................................................................................5-4
5.3 Cable Connection ...............................................................................5-5
5.4 Cable Handling....................................................................................5-6
5.5 Function Setting..................................................................................5-7
5.6 System Configuration.........................................................................5-8

6. After-Sales Service....................................................................................6-1
6.1 Warranty ..............................................................................................6-1
6.2 Stock Periods of Maintenance Parts .................................................6-1
6.3 When Requesting Repair....................................................................6-1
 6.4 Optional Maintenance Checks ...........................................................6-1

7. Disposal .....................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Disposal of This Equipment...............................................................7-1

8. Specifications ............................................................................................8-1
8.1 General Specification .........................................................................8-1
8.2 Environmental Specification ..............................................................8-1
8.3 External Interface................................................................................8-1
8.4 Mechanical Specifications .................................................................8-2
8.4.1 Mechanical details of desk mounting type ................................................ 8-2
8.4.2 Mechanical details of flush mounting type................................................ 8-3
8.4.3 Mechanical parts list.................................................................................... 8-4
 1. Equipment Overview
1.1 Functions
This equipment (NKG-94) is intended to receive navigation data such as the location, time, speed
and course sent from a GPS navigator. It also receives water temperature, depth and tidal current
data, and can print it.

1.2 Features
● Printing of GPS/navigation/external equipment data (water temperature, depth and tidal
current).

● Printing automatically the above data at the specified print time intervals.

● Printing out Japanese/English availably.

● Wide range voltage supply input DC12-24V.

1-1
1.3 Configuration

[Standard Configuration]

NKG-94
No. Name Model Code Q’ty Remark
1 Printer NKG-94 NKG-94 1
2 Installation screw MPTG31659 MPTG31659 4 Tapping screw: 4pieces
3 Fuse MF51NR 250V 3.15 5ZFGD00201 2
4 Printer paper 7ZPJD0384 7ZPJD0384 1
5 Instruction manual 7ZPNA4222 7ZPNA4222 1

[Option]

No. Name Model Code Q’ty Remark

Power unit
1 (Rectifier of NBD-577C NBD-577C 1
AC power source)
Hexagon head bolt: 2pieces,
2 Flush mounting kit MPBC45945 MPBC45945 1 Flat head screw: 2pieces,
Tapping screw: 4pieces

1-2
1.4 Structure
• NKG-94 Printer

Body
Bracket

Unit: mm
Mass: 2.2kg or less

1-3
1.5 Schematic Diagram

GPS navigator Navigation

interface
NDF-167

Output buffer
NQA-4251A

250V-TTYCS-1

DATA IN

Printer
NKG-94

DC12/24V

DC24V
0.6/1kV-DPYC-1.5 Power unit
(Rectifier of AC power source)
NBD-577C

AC110/220V
DC12～24V

1-4
2. Names and Functions of Components
2.1 Front Panel
５

[Component name]
６
1. POWER KEY

Pressing the upper side of the POWER KEY (POWER switch) activates the green power lamp in the
key on this switch to indicate that the power has been turned on.

2. PRINT KEY

Pressing the PRINT KEY (PRINT switch) prints the navigation data.

3. FEED KEY

Pressing this switch feeds printer paper from the printer.

4. PRINT TIME INTERVAL SETTING switch

This switch set sprint time interval to print.

5. PAPER COVER OPEN button

When replacing the printer paper, pressing this button opens the paper cover.

6. PAPER COVER
This cover holds the printer paper in its holder.

2-1
 3. Printer Operations
3.1 Turning Power On

[Operation]

1. Press the upper side of the POWER KEY.

The green power lamp turns on.

[Note]
When not receiving data, a green power lamp blinks.

3.2 Turning Power Off

[Operation]
1. Press the lower side of the POWER KEY.

The green power lamp turns off.

3-1
3.3 Loading Printer Paper

CAUTION
Be careful not to cut your hand with the paper cutter of the printer, and then replace
the printer paper. It may cause the injury.

[Operation]

PAPER COVER
OPEN button

Surface thermal
paper

Printing Paper

1. Press the PAPER COVER OPEN button to open the PAPER COVER.

2. Turn the surface on the thermal paper (the smooth surface) of the printing paper toward the head
side. And then insert the printing paper into the paper holder of the main body.

3. Confirm that the leading edge of the paper comes out from the printer. And then close the paper
cover with pushing the both ends of the upper cover.

[Note]
If red lines appear at the edges of the paper, it informs to replace to a new roll (the red lines indicate
there is 50cm or less remaining).

3-2
3.4 Feeding the Printer Paper

[Operation]
1. Press the FEED KEY.

Pressing this switch feeds printer paper from the printer.

3.5 Printing

-The printing data is 3 kinds of data which are GPS/navigation/external equipment data. Needed data
can be selected with a dip switch. (Refer to item 5.5 Function Setting.)
- The equipment has 2 kinds of data printing method.
(1) The equipment can print periodically the above data with presetting an appropriate print time
interval. Also the equipment can be set no print.
(2) The equipment can print at arbitrary time by pressing the PRINT KEY.

3.5.1 Printing periodically

- The equipment can print data periodically with preset print time
interval.
- The print time interval is OFF, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min,
30 min or 60 min.
- When the preset print time interval is “OFF”, printing is
not activated periodically.
- The each preset print time interval is based on 0 minutes each hour.
For example, in case the preset print time interval is set 5 min at 10:04,
the equipment prints data in at 10:05, at 10:10, at 10:15, -----.

[Operation]
1. Turn the PRINT TIME INTERVAL SETTING switch to select an
appropriate print time interval.

3.5.2 Printing at arbitrary time

- The equipment can print at arbitrary time.

- Even if the preset print time interval is set (including OFF), printing
can be carry out at an arbitrary time.

[Operation]
1. Press the PRINT KEY.

Pressing the PRINT KEY allows you to print data at the time
pressed the KEY.

3-3
3.5.3 Printing example

A printing example shows at received all data of a NMEA0183.

Time
U: UTC Fixed mode
Year, month, day L : Local time Geodetic System
Current Position
'10-NOV-25 16:19U DGPS3D W84 DOP level
Satellite number in use N35°43.393' E139°34.300'
/Signal level Antenna height
27/55 10/54 25/52 08/54 HDOP02
Course / Speed
CRS/SPD 012.1°011.6kn HT 015m Distance to destination RL: Rhumb lines
Bearing to destination GC: Great Circle
BRG 359° RNG 00003.6NM RL
Time to go to the destination TTG --:-- XTE L 00.04NM Course deviation
Destination number Steering direction
DEST WPT 00002
Destination position N35°46.97' E139°34.25'
ORIGIN WPT 00000 Past destination number
Past destination position
---°--.--' ----°--.--'
Water depth Water temperature
DPTH 0252.6m TEMP +15.1℃
TIDE-A 02.7kn 040.3°0009.8m
TIDE-B 03.9kn 039.5°0049.8m Tidal current data
TIDE-C 03.8kn 041.6°0109.3m

3.5.4 Printing items and data in use

The following table shows that this equipment can print items used data. At printing, data needed for
the printing has to be supplied to the printer.

No. Item JRC NDF-167 NMEA0183

1 GPS data
1.1 Year, month, day Ο Ο ZDA RMC
1.2 Time Ο Ο ZDA RMC GGA GLL
1.3 UTC/Local time Ο none ZDA
1.4 Fixed mode Ο none GGA RMC GLL VTG
1.5 Geodetic system none none DTM
1.6 Current position Ο Ο GGA RMC GLL
1.7 Satellite number Ο none GSA&GSV
in use/Signal level
1.8 DOP level Ο none GGA GSA
1.9 Course Ο Ο RMC VTG
1.10 Speed Ο Ο RMC VTG
1.11 Antenna height Ο none GGA
2 Navigation data
2.1 Bearing to destination from Ο none BWR BWC RMB APB
current position Ο none BWR BWC RMB
2.2 Distance to destination Ο none none
2.3 Time to go to the destination Ο none RMB APB XTE
2.4 Course deviation Ο none RMB
2.5 Past destination number Ο none RMB BWR BWC
2.6 Destination number Ο none none
2.7 Past destination position Ο none RMB BWR BWC
2.8 Destination position Ο none RMB APB XTE
2.9 Steering direction Ο none
3 External equipment data
3.1 Water depth none Ο DBT DPT
3.2 Water temperature none Ο MTW
3.3 Tidal current none Ο CUR
NMEA0183 is high priority as more left side.

3-4
3.6 Printing Test
- This equipment can perform the printing test.
- The printing test confirms its software version number, dip switch setting condition, alphabet, numeric.

[Operation]
1. Press and hold the PRINT KEY and press the POWER KEY.

Printing test results are printed.

(Refer to the following printing test example.)

Printing test example

Printing direction
ORDER : Normal
Software version number GPS：GPS data
REVERSE: Reverse
NAV：Navigation data
OPTION：External equipment data

Language Ver 00.01.005

English ：English English ORDER
カタカナ：Japanese GPS NAV OPTION
Date 'YY-MM-DD LOCAL UTC/LOCAL
Baud rate 4800 1 NONE
Stop bit Alphabet
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Parity bit
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
1234567890 Numeric
ｱｲｳｴｵｶｷｸｹｺｻｼｽｾｿﾀﾁﾂﾃﾄﾅﾆﾇﾈﾉﾊﾋﾌﾍﾎ
ﾏﾐﾑﾒﾓﾔｲﾕｴﾖﾗﾘﾙﾚﾛﾜｲｳｴｦﾝ
Japanese (カタカナ)
When Japanese is selected in Language

3-5
 4. Maintenance and Inspection
Longevity for Equipment is greatly influenced by the suitability of maintenance.
Therefore the following check items need to constantly maintain the best performance.

WARNING
Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits.
Inspection or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician
may result in fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. If internal inspection or repair
is necessary, contact our service center or agents.

CAUTION
Use only MF51NR 250V 3.15 fuses. The use of other fuse may cause fire and/or
damage.

Always use the JRC- designated printer paper (7ZPJD0384). The use of any
other paper may cause printer trouble and/or deterioration of print-out quality.

When cleaning, do not use benzene, alcohol, thinner, or other volatile

solvents. The coated surface may deteriorate or be damaged. Wipe the
surface lightly with a soft cloth.

Do not get inside of this printer wet.

It may cause failure, malfunction, and/or deterioration of print-out quality.

4.1 General Maintenance and Check Items

- Maintain power-supply within the specified voltage (DC10.8-31.2V) constantly.
- At replacing the fuses, carry out its replacement according to “4.2 Fuse Replacement”.
- Carry out the normal maintenance shown the following table.

No. Item Maintenance and Check

Wipe the equipment with a dry soft cloth. Or wipe the equipment with a
1 Cleaning
cloth soaked neutral detergent, and then dry it well with a dry soft cloth.
- Open the PAPER COVER, and then check remaining of the printing
Remaining paper.
2 Check of - When remaining of the printing paper becomes 50cm of less, red lines
Printing Paper appear at the edges of the paper. So replace to a new roll of the printing
paper.

4-1
4.2 Fuse Replacement
4.2.1 Removing maintenance cover (for preparation work)

CAUTION
The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off, when removing
the maintenance cover. Failure to observe this warning may cause electrical
shock and/or malfunction.

Fuse
Screw

Dip switches

Screw

Maintenance
cover

The procedure for removing the maintenance case is as follows:

1. Press the lower side of the POWER KEY (to turn off the equipment).
2. Cut off power to the printer by turning off the power switch on the power distribution panel.
3. Loosen the 2 screws, and then remove the rear cover.

4-2
4.2.2 Replacing fuses

CAUTION
The power switch on the power distribution panel must be turned off during
replacing a fuse. When replacing a fuse, use extreme caution not to bring it into
contact with adjacent ones. Short-circuiting due to making contact may cause
power and/or circuit board damage.

Use only MF51NR 250V 3.15 fuses. The use of other fuse may cause fire and/or
damage.

The replacement procedure is as follows:

1. Lift one end of the blown fuse using a tool such as a thin tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the fuse.
3. Place a new fuse in the fuse holder.
4. Push the new fuse into position.

Procedure: 3, 4
Procedure: 2

Procedure: 1

4-3
4.3 Printer Unit Replacing Procedure
When some dead pixel(s) or the printer unit breaks down, the unit has to be replaced to the new unit
according to the following procedure. Therefore request to our service center or agents to carry out this
replacement work.

4.3.1 Removing front panel unit (for preparation work)

CAUTION
The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off, when removing
the front panel. Failure to observe this warning may cause electrical shock
and/or malfunction.

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Front panel unit

The procedure for removing the front panel unit is as follows:

1. Press the lower side of the POWER KEY (to turn off the equipment).
2. Cut off power to the printer by turning off the power switch on the power distribution panel.
3. Remove the 4 screws, and then remove the front panel unit.

4-4
4.3.2 Replacing printer unit

CAUTION
The power switch on the power distribution panel is turned off, when replacing
the printer unit. Failure to observe this warning may cause electrical shock
and/or malfunction.

Connector Click

Screw

Connector cable

Screw

Printer Unit
Screw
Screw

Front panel unit

The replacement procedure is as follows:

1. Push and expand the connector click.
2. Remove the connector cable fitted closely with the connector click.
3. Remove the 4 screws.
4. Remove the printer unit from the front panel unit, and then replace the new printer unit.
5. Reassemble the printer unit according to reversely the above procedure as the setp3 to the step1.
(Tightening torque at the 4 screws: 25N-cm)

4-5
 4.4 Maintenance Parts
-The maintenance par list is showed the following table:

Part name Model number JRC part code

Printer unit H-7HPJD0001 7HPJD0001
Printing paper H-7ZPJD0384 7ZPJD0384
Fuse MF51NR 250V 3.15 5ZFGD00201

4.5 Trouble Shooting

WARNING
Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits.
Inspection or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in
fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. If internal inspection or repair is necessary,
contact our service center or agents.

As for reference, the following trouble shooting table shows to find out some malfunction point:
Symptom of Cause of infer/ malfunction Countermeasure
malfunction
Even if pressing the Power is not supplied from the power Check whether the wiring from the power
POWER KEY, the distribution panel in the ship. distribution panel is normal or not.
equipment is not Power is not supplied from the power Check whether the wiring from the power
turned power on. unit (option). unit or not.
A fuse in the equipment is blown-out. Check whether the wiring is normal or
not, and then replace the blown-out fuses
in the equipment.
The fuse in the power unit (option) is Checked whether the wiring is normal or
blown-out. not, and then replace the blown-out fuses
in the power unit.
The POWER KEY switch is Request to our service center or agent to
malfunctioned. repair it.
The equipment does The power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
not print at its
periodical time. The print time interval is incorrectly set. Set correctly the print time interval.
The each preset print time interval is
based on 0 minutes per hour. Refer to
“3.5 Printing” as detail operation.
The printing paper is not loaded. Load the printing paper.
The PRINT TIME INTERVAL SETTING Request to our service center or agent to
switch is malfunctioned. repair it.
The paper cover is opening condition. Close completely the paper cover.
Even if pressing the The power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
PRINT KEY, the The printing paper is not loaded. Load the printing paper.
equipment does not
print data. The PRINT KEY switch is Request to our service center or agent to
malfunctioned. repair it.
The paper cover is opening condition. Close completely the paper cover.
The equipment does The needed printing data cannot be Input (supply) the needed printing data.
not print some received.
item(s) in data.
The equipment has The printer unit is malfunctioned. Request to our service center or agent to
some dead pixel(s). repair it.
Even if pressing the The power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
FEED KEY, the The printing paper is not loaded. Load the printing paper.
equipment dopes not The FEED KEY switch is Request to our service center or agent to
feed the printing malfunctioned. repair it.
paper.
The paper cover is opening condition. Close completely the paper cover.
The green lamp on The equipment cannot receive data. Check whether the wiring is normal or
the POWER KEY not, and then receive data.
blinks. Check to meet its baud rate.

4-6
 5. Installation
5.1 Installation Procedure
5.1.1 Desk mounting type installation procedure

CAUTION
When installing, fix the bracket steadily on a hard wood-board with the
JRC-designated screws. If not, it may fall and result in personal injury and/or
damage or of the printer or other things.

When installing on the overhead or wall, it secure tolerable intensity of the weight,
the force of maintaining check and replacing the printer paper. If not, it may fall and
result in personal injury and/or damage or of the printer or other things.

The following is the procedures for installing the equipment:

1. Loosen the knobs of the equipment, and then remove the body from the bracket.
2. Screw down the bracket at the desired location with attached the 4 installation screws
（MPTG31659）.
3. Remount the body onto the bracket, and then tighten the knobs to lock the body in place.
340 or more 160 or more

190 or more

Knob Body
Bracket
Required Space for Equipment Installation

Unit: mm

Bracket (Bottom Face)

5-1
5.1.2 Flush mounting type installation procedure

When installing the flush mounting type, the flush mounting kit (MPBC45945) of the options is required.

The following is the procedures for installing the equipment:

1. Loosen the knobs of the equipment, and then remove the body (including the knobs and the rubber
spacer) from the bracket.
2. Remove the knobs and the rubber spacers from the body.
3. Set the flush mounting panel on the body, and then screw down their sides with the hexagon head
bolts and screw down their bottom with the flat fillister head screws.
4. Insert the equipment setting the mounting panel into the installed place, and then screw down it
with the tapping screws.

Hexagon head bolts

(Flush mounting kit)
Knob
Rubber Spacer

Bracket

Body Knob
Flat head screws
Rubber Spacer Flush mounting panel (Flush mounting kit)
(Flush mounting kit)

Tapping screws
(Flush mounting kit) Mounting Condition Drawing

5-2
 160 or more
Required Space for設置に必要なスペース
Equipment Installation

Size Cut Form for Equipment Installation

設置に必要な切欠き穴サイズ
Unit:
単位：mm mm

5-3
5.2 Rear Panel

Name plate Maintenance cover

Terminal block cover Grounding terminal (EARTH)

Cable fixture

Dip switch

D-SUB connector
Fuses

Terminal block

Rear Panel Drawing at Removing Maintenance Cover and Terminal Block Cover

5-4
 5.3 Cable Connection
Connectors on rear panel of body

D-SUB connector:
When connecting to PC (RS-232C),
use this connector.

External equipment terminals:

When connecting to external equipment like
that, use the terminals.

Grounding terminal:
When needed to the earth, connect this terminal to the earth.

Power terminals:
Use the terminals to supply DC power to the equipment.

Grounding terminal (EARTH):

When needed to the earth, connect this terminal
to the ship’s earth.

5-5
5.4 Cable Handling

Cable fixture

Banding band

Cable fixture Banding band Cable

Bounded Cable Example

1. Lead the cables connected on the terminals on the terminal block toward the cable fixture.
2. Put the cables on the top of the cable fixture.
3. Fix the cables on the top of the cable fixture with the banding band.

z The above drawing shows that the banding band is applied to the vertical direction example.
z When the vertical direction banding is inconvenient on its installing condition, change the banding
band direction to the horizontal.

5-6
5.5 Function Setting
- The functions and communication protocol of the equipment are set by the dip switches.
- The dip switches (S1, S2) are set to meet its using condition.
- The dip switches have been set the positions shown the boldface in the following table at shipping the
factory.
- The dip switch (S3) for our service engineers must not change the positions.
The normal positions of S3 are all OFF.

[Setting Method]
1. Loosen the 2 screws at the maintenance cover on the rear panel, and then remove the cover.

2. Set the dip switches according to the following table.

3. Fit the maintenance cover on the rear panel, and then screw

down the cover with the 2 screws. S3

S2

S1

(1) Function Switch: S1 Dip Switch Location

Table5-1: Function switch: S1
No. Function ON OFF Remarks
1 Printing language Japanese English Japanese is katakana (Japanese
syllabary characters)
2 Printing direction ORDER REVERSE Set to OFF for “REVERSE” at this
(normal) (Reverse) equipment.
3 Printing GPS data Print No print When GPS data is not required,
set to OFF for “No print”
4 Printing navigation Print No print When navigation data is not
data required, set to OFF for “No
print”
5 Printing external Print No print When external equipment data is
equipment data not required, set to OFF for “No
print”
6 Priority of Prioritized UTC Even if setting ON for “Prioritized
UTC/Local Local Local”, UTC is printed at no
time-zone difference data.
7 Date display Refer to table 5-2.
8

Table 5-2: Date display

Date display bit7 bit8
'YY-MM-DD ON ON
OFF ON
MM DD,'YY ON OFF
DD MM,'YY OFF OFF

5-7
 (2) Communication Function Switch: S2
S2 sets to communication protocol for printing data.

Table 5-3: Communication function switch: S2

No. Function ON OFF Remarks
1 Bit rate Refer to
2 table5-4
3 Stop bit 2bit 1bit NMEA：1bit JRC,NDF-167：2bit
4 Parity bit Refer to table 5-5
5
6 Spare OFF
7 Reservation OFF
8 Reservation OFF

Table 5-4: Bit rate

Bit rate [bps] bit1 bit2 Remarks
1200 OFF OFF JRC,NDF-167
4800 ON OFF NMEA
38400 OFF ON
ON ON

Table 5-5: Parity bit

Parity bit [bps] bit4 bit5 Remarks
None OFF OFF NMEA,JRC,NDF-167
Even ON OFF
Odd OFF ON
ON ON

5.6 System Configuration

The following shows a typical system configuration:

5-8
 6. After-Sales Service
6.1 Warranty
• Although warranty is our regulations with customers, the normal warranty is 1 (one) year from the
purchased day.

6.2 Stock Periods of Maintenance Parts

• After discontinued the equipment production, the maintenance parts (required to maintain the
equipment performance) is 10 (ten) years.

6.3 When Requesting Repair

If you suspect that a problem has occurred, take the following diagnostic after checking according to
“4.5 Trouble Shooting”
If the above checks uncover any abnormalities, stop operations of the equipment immediately and then
contact our dealer, service representative or JRC sales.

• Repairs within the warranty period When some malfunction occurs at normal operation according
to the explanation and direction of the instruction manual, repairs within the warranty period will
be performed free of charge at a place appointed by JRC, our dealer or service representative. If
the malfunction occurs due to improper usage, fault, or any external abnormal condition such as
fire, pollution, abnormal voltage, natural disaster (ex. thunder storms, earthquake) etc., repairs of
the equipment will be charged.
• After the expiry of the warranty period If the corresponding function can be restored by repair,
out-of-warranty repairs will be performed at your request. Please note that this repair is not free of
charge. In this case, the malfunctioned equipment has to send to our company or has to be
repaired on boarding your vessel at a place appointed by our dealer/service representative. When
repairing impassably onboard, the malfunctioned equipment could be repaired in our factory.
• Information for service When requesting repair, give our dealer, service representative or JRC
sales the following information for the service:
- Product name, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number
- Its detail malfunction conditions
- Name, address, and phone number of your company or institution, and your name

6.4 Optional Maintenance Checks

Over a period of time, the performance of various components will deteriorate. The actual rate of
deterioration will vary according to the operating conditions and environment. It is therefore
recommended for your equipment to undergo optional maintenance and servicing in addition to your
own checks. Please contact our dealer or JRC sales or service representative for optional services. A
Fee is charged for these services.

If you have any questions about after-sale services, please contact your our dealer or JRC sales or
service representative.

“JRC Sales/Service Representative”: See the List of JRC Product Dealers and JRC Sales/Service
Representatives at the end of this manual.

6-1
6-2
 7. Disposal
7.1 Disposal of This Equipment
● If this equipment is to be disposed of, process it in accordance with the legal regulations and the
rules of the local government having jurisdiction.

7-1
7-2
 8. Specifications
8.1 General Specification
• Printing type : Thermo-sensitive line dot
• Total characters / line : 32
• Printing paper : 7ZPJD0384, 58mm x 50mm across x 25m
• Out-of paper detection : Appeared the red lines at the edges of the paper
(The red lines indicate there is 50cm or less remaining)
• Input data format : NMEA0183、JRC、NDF-167 data
• Printing data : GPS data, navigation data, external equipment data
• Dip switch setting : S1 Printing language, Printing direction, Printing data (GPS/
Navigation / external equipment data), Date (year, month, day),
Local time
S2 Communication protocol
• Input power Voltage : DC12V - 24V
• Power consumption : 30W or less
• Dimensions : 200mm width x 160mm height x 120mm depth
• Mass : 2.2 kg or less

8.2 Environmental Specification

• Operation temperature : -15 to +55°C
• Storage temperature : -25 to +70°C
• Relative humidity : 93% at 40°C Not to condense dew.
• Vibration : In accordance with IEC60945 ed.4
• EMC : In accordance with IEC60945 ed.4

8.3 External Interface

Serial communication
Interface name Spec. Input/ Format Remarks
Output
422 in+/- RS-422 Input NMEA0183,JRC,NDF-167 data
232C RX/TX RS-232C Input, Program data Up dated by PC
Output

(1) NMEA
• Specification : NMEA0183
• Version number : Ver1.5/2.1/2.3
• Bit rate : 4800bps
• Data bit : 8bits
• Parity : None
• Start bit : 1bit
• Stop bit : 1bit
• Input sentence : GGA,RMC,GLL,VTG,DTM,ZDA,GSA,GSV,
DBT,DPT,MTW,CUR,APB,BWC,BWR,RMB,XTE

(2) JRC Interface NDF F-167 data

• Specification : By JRC
• Bit rate : 1200bps
• Data bit : 8bits
• Parity : None
• Start bit : 1bit
• Stop bit : 2bits

8-1
8.4 Mechanical Specifications
8.4.1 Mechanical details of desk mounting type

8-2
8.4.2 Mechanical details of flush mounting type

Body
(Internal structure is as same as
the desk mounting type.)

8-3
 8.4.3 Mechanical parts list

No. Part name Q’ty Remarks

1 Front panel Unit 1
1a Front panel 1
1b Print time interval setting switch 1
1c Feed key switch 1
1d Print key switch 1
1e Power key switch 1
1f Switch knob 1
2 Cabinet 1
3 Rear panel 1
4 PCB unit 1
5 D-SUB fixture 1
6 Printer unit 1 Maintenance part
7 Terminal block cover 1
8 Cable fixture 1
9 Maintenance cover 1
10 Terminal block 1
11 truss head screw (M3x6) 4
12 CA washer (M3) 4
13 Flat head screw (M2.6x6) 2
14 C sems Screw (M3x6) 5
15 B sems Screw (M3x8) 8
16 C sems Screw (M3x8) 4
17 B sems Screw (M3x10) 2
18 C sems Screw (M3x14) 2
19 Wing head bolt (M4x12) 1
20 Spring washer (M4) 1
21 Washer (M4) 2
22 Rubber spacer 2
23 Knob 2
24 Bracket 1
25 Installation screw 1 Attached part
25a Tapping screw (5x20) 4
25b Washer (M5) 4
26 Flush mounting kit 1 Option
26a Flush mounting panel 1
26b Hexagon head bolt (M6x14) 2
26c Flat head screw (M3x6) 2
26d Tapping screw (5x20) 4

8-4
 For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPNA4222 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JUN. 2011 Edition 1 JRC Printed in Japan